blob: 30d7696bd9b9cb64636832b7990a02d4ea2beb3d [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2 *
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
4 *
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8 */
9
10/*
11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12 */
13
14#include "vim.h"
15#include "version.h"
16
17#ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18# include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */
19#endif
20
21static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000026static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src));
27
28/*
29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
30 */
31 int
32get_indent()
33{
34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
35}
36
37/*
38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
39 */
40 int
41get_indent_lnum(lnum)
42 linenr_T lnum;
43{
44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
45}
46
47#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
48/*
49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
50 * "buf".
51 */
52 int
53get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
54 buf_T *buf;
55 linenr_T lnum;
56{
57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
58}
59#endif
60
61/*
62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
63 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
64 */
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000065 int
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000066get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
67 char_u *ptr;
68 int ts;
69{
70 int count = 0;
71
72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
73 {
74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */
75 count += ts - (count % ts);
76 else if (*ptr == ' ')
77 ++count; /* count a space for one */
78 else
79 break;
80 }
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000081 return count;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000082}
83
84/*
85 * Set the indent of the current line.
86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
87 * Caller must take care of undo.
88 * "flags":
89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line.
91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it.
92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
93 */
94 int
95set_indent(size, flags)
96 int size;
97 int flags;
98{
99 char_u *p;
100 char_u *newline;
101 char_u *oldline;
102 char_u *s;
103 int todo;
104 int ind_len;
105 int line_len;
106 int doit = FALSE;
107 int ind_done;
108 int tab_pad;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000109 int retval = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000110
111 /*
112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113 * characters needed for the indent.
114 */
115 todo = size;
116 ind_len = 0;
117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118
119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120 * isn't already set */
121
122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124 {
125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 {
129 ind_done = 0;
130
131 /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 {
134 if (*p == TAB)
135 {
136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 if (todo < tab_pad)
140 break;
141 todo -= tab_pad;
142 ++ind_len;
143 ind_done += tab_pad;
144 }
145 else
146 {
147 --todo;
148 ++ind_len;
149 ++ind_done;
150 }
151 ++p;
152 }
153
154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 {
158 doit = TRUE;
159 todo -= tab_pad;
160 ++ind_len;
161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 }
163 }
164
165 /* count tabs required for indent */
166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 {
168 if (*p != TAB)
169 doit = TRUE;
170 else
171 ++p;
172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 ++ind_len;
174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 }
176 }
177 /* count spaces required for indent */
178 while (todo > 0)
179 {
180 if (*p != ' ')
181 doit = TRUE;
182 else
183 ++p;
184 --todo;
185 ++ind_len;
186 /* ++ind_done; */
187 }
188
189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 return FALSE;
192
193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 p = oldline;
196 else
197 p = skipwhite(p);
198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200 if (newline == NULL)
201 return FALSE;
202
203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204 s = newline;
205 todo = size;
206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208 {
209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 {
213 p = oldline;
214 ind_done = 0;
215
216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 {
218 if (*p == TAB)
219 {
220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 if (todo < tab_pad)
224 break;
225 todo -= tab_pad;
226 ind_done += tab_pad;
227 }
228 else
229 {
230 --todo;
231 ++ind_done;
232 }
233 *s++ = *p++;
234 }
235
236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 {
240 *s++ = TAB;
241 todo -= tab_pad;
242 }
243
244 p = skipwhite(p);
245 }
246
247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 {
249 *s++ = TAB;
250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 }
252 }
253 while (todo > 0)
254 {
255 *s++ = ' ';
256 --todo;
257 }
258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259
260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262 {
263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000270 retval = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000271 }
272 else
273 vim_free(newline);
274
275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000276 return retval;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000277}
278
279/*
280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
283 */
284 static int
285copy_indent(size, src)
286 int size;
287 char_u *src;
288{
289 char_u *p = NULL;
290 char_u *line = NULL;
291 char_u *s;
292 int todo;
293 int ind_len;
294 int line_len = 0;
295 int tab_pad;
296 int ind_done;
297 int round;
298
299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */
301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
302 {
303 todo = size;
304 ind_len = 0;
305 ind_done = 0;
306 s = src;
307
308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
310 {
311 if (*s == TAB)
312 {
313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
316 if (todo < tab_pad)
317 break;
318 todo -= tab_pad;
319 ind_done += tab_pad;
320 }
321 else
322 {
323 --todo;
324 ++ind_done;
325 }
326 ++ind_len;
327 if (round == 2)
328 *p++ = *s;
329 ++s;
330 }
331
332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
334 if (todo >= tab_pad)
335 {
336 todo -= tab_pad;
337 ++ind_len;
338 if (round == 2)
339 *p++ = TAB;
340 }
341
342 /* Add tabs required for indent */
343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
344 {
345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
346 ++ind_len;
347 if (round == 2)
348 *p++ = TAB;
349 }
350
351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */
352 while (todo > 0)
353 {
354 --todo;
355 ++ind_len;
356 if (round == 2)
357 *p++ = ' ';
358 }
359
360 if (round == 1)
361 {
362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
363 * and the rest of the line. */
364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
366 if (line == NULL)
367 return FALSE;
368 p = line;
369 }
370 }
371
372 /* Append the original line */
373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
374
375 /* Replace the line */
376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
377
378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
380 return TRUE;
381}
382
383/*
384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no
385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000387 */
388 int
389get_number_indent(lnum)
390 linenr_T lnum;
391{
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000392 colnr_T col;
393 pos_T pos;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000394 regmmatch_T regmatch;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000395
396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
397 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000398 pos.lnum = 0;
399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
401 {
402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
403 if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
404 {
405 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
406 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
408 pos.coladd = 0;
409#endif
410 }
411 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
412 }
413
414 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000415 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000416 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
417 return (int)col;
418}
419
420#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
421
422static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
423
424/*
425 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
426 */
427 static int
428cin_is_cinword(line)
429 char_u *line;
430{
431 char_u *cinw;
432 char_u *cinw_buf;
433 int cinw_len;
434 int retval = FALSE;
435 int len;
436
437 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
438 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
439 if (cinw_buf != NULL)
440 {
441 line = skipwhite(line);
442 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
443 {
444 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
445 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
446 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
447 {
448 retval = TRUE;
449 break;
450 }
451 }
452 vim_free(cinw_buf);
453 }
454 return retval;
455}
456#endif
457
458/*
459 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
460 *
461 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
462 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
463 *
464 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
465 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
466 * new line.
467 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor
468 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments
469 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces
470 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break
471 *
472 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
473 */
474 int
475open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
476 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
477 int flags;
478 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
479{
480 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */
481 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */
482 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */
483 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */
484 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */
485 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */
486 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */
487 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */
488 int n;
489 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */
490 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */
491#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
492 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */
493 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */
494 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
495 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */
496#endif
497 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */
498#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
499 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
500 char_u *p;
501#endif
502 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
503#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
504 pos_T *pos;
505#endif
506#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
507 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
508# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
509 && !curbuf->b_p_cin
510# endif
511 );
512 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */
513 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
514#endif
515#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
516 int vreplace_mode;
517#endif
518 int did_append; /* appended a new line */
519 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
520
521 /*
522 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
523 */
524 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
525 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
526 return FALSE;
527
528#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
529 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
530 {
531 /*
532 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
533 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play
534 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then
535 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
536 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
537 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
538 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb.
539 */
540 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
541 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
542 else
543 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
544 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
545 goto theend;
546
547 /*
548 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
549 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
550 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that
551 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
552 * etc) a bit later.
553 */
554 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
555 replace_push(NUL);
556 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
557 while (*p != NUL)
558 replace_push(*p++);
559 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
560 }
561#endif
562
563 if ((State & INSERT)
564#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
565 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
566#endif
567 )
568 {
569 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
570#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
571 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */
572 {
573 p = skipwhite(p_extra);
574 first_char = *p;
575 }
576#endif
577#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
578 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
579#endif
580 saved_char = *p_extra;
581 *p_extra = NUL;
582 }
583
584 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
585#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
586 did_si = FALSE;
587#endif
588 ai_col = 0;
589
590 /*
591 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
592 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not
593 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
594 */
595 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
596 trunc_line = TRUE;
597
598 /*
599 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
600 * indent to use for the new line.
601 */
602 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
603#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
604 || do_si
605#endif
606 )
607 {
608 /*
609 * count white space on current line
610 */
611 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
612 if (newindent == 0)
613 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */
614
615#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
616 /*
617 * Do smart indenting.
618 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
619 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
620 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
621 * "if (condition) {"
622 */
623 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
624 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
625 {
626 char_u *ptr;
627 char_u last_char;
628
629 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
630 ptr = saved_line;
631# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
632 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
633 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
634 else
635 lead_len = 0;
636# endif
637 if (dir == FORWARD)
638 {
639 /*
640 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
641 * recognised as comments.
642 */
643 if (
644# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
645 lead_len == 0 &&
646# endif
647 ptr[0] == '#')
648 {
649 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
650 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
651 newindent = get_indent();
652 }
653# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
654 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
655 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
656 else
657 lead_len = 0;
658 if (lead_len > 0)
659 {
660 /*
661 * This case gets the following right:
662 * \*
663 * * A comment (read '\' as '/').
664 * *\
665 * #define IN_THE_WAY
666 * This should line up here;
667 */
668 p = skipwhite(ptr);
669 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
670 p++;
671 if (p[0] == '*')
672 {
673 for (p++; *p; p++)
674 {
675 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
676 {
677 /*
678 * End of C comment, indent should line up
679 * with the line containing the start of
680 * the comment
681 */
682 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
683 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
684 {
685 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
686 newindent = get_indent();
687 }
688 }
689 }
690 }
691 }
692 else /* Not a comment line */
693# endif
694 {
695 /* Find last non-blank in line */
696 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
697 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
698 --p;
699 last_char = *p;
700
701 /*
702 * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
703 */
704 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
705 {
706 if (p > ptr)
707 --p;
708 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
709 --p;
710 }
711 /*
712 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
713 * lines. eg:
714 * if (condition &&
715 * condition) {
716 * Should line up here!
717 * }
718 */
719 if (*p == ')')
720 {
721 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
722 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
723 {
724 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
725 newindent = get_indent();
726 ptr = ml_get_curline();
727 }
728 }
729 /*
730 * If last character is '{' do indent, without
731 * checking for "if" and the like.
732 */
733 if (last_char == '{')
734 {
735 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */
736 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */
737 }
738 /*
739 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
740 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
741 * '}'.
742 */
743 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
744 && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
745 did_si = TRUE;
746 }
747 }
748 else /* dir == BACKWARD */
749 {
750 /*
751 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
752 * recognised as comments.
753 */
754 if (
755# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
756 lead_len == 0 &&
757# endif
758 ptr[0] == '#')
759 {
760 int was_backslashed = FALSE;
761
762 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
763 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
764 {
765 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
766 was_backslashed = TRUE;
767 else
768 was_backslashed = FALSE;
769 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
770 }
771 if (was_backslashed)
772 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */
773 else
774 newindent = get_indent();
775 }
776 p = skipwhite(ptr);
777 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
778 did_si = TRUE;
779 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
780 can_si_back = TRUE;
781 }
782 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
783 }
784 if (do_si)
785 can_si = TRUE;
786#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
787
788 did_ai = TRUE;
789 }
790
791#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
792 /*
793 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
794 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
795 */
796 end_comment_pending = NUL;
797 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
798 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
799 else
800 lead_len = 0;
801 if (lead_len > 0)
802 {
803 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */
804 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */
805 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
806 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
807 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */
808 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */
809 int current_flag;
810 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */
811 char_u *p2;
812
813 /*
814 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
815 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
816 */
817 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
818 {
819 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
820 {
821 require_blank = TRUE;
822 continue;
823 }
824 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
825 {
826 current_flag = *p;
827 if (*p == COM_START)
828 {
829 /*
830 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
831 */
832 if (dir == BACKWARD)
833 {
834 lead_len = 0;
835 break;
836 }
837
838 /* find start of middle part */
839 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
840 require_blank = FALSE;
841 }
842
843 /*
844 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
845 */
846 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */
847 {
848 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
849 require_blank = TRUE;
850 ++p;
851 }
852 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
853
854 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */
855 {
856 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
857 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
858 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
859 ++p;
860 }
861 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
862
863 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */
864 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
865
866 /*
867 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
868 * the comment leader.
869 */
870 if (dir == FORWARD)
871 {
872 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
873 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
874 {
875 comment_end = p;
876 lead_len = 0;
877 break;
878 }
879 }
880
881 /*
882 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
883 */
884 if (lead_len > 0)
885 {
886 if (current_flag == COM_START)
887 {
888 lead_repl = lead_middle;
889 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
890 }
891
892 /*
893 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
894 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
895 * comment leader on the next line.
896 */
897 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
898 && ((p_extra != NULL
899 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
900 || (p_extra == NULL
901 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
902 || require_blank))
903 extra_space = TRUE;
904 }
905 break;
906 }
907 if (*p == COM_END)
908 {
909 /*
910 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
911 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
912 * start (for C-comments).
913 */
914 if (dir == FORWARD)
915 {
916 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
917 lead_len = 0;
918 break;
919 }
920
921 /*
922 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
923 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
924 */
925 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
926 --p;
927 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
928 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
929 ;
930 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
931
932 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
933 * the comment-end */
934 extra_space = TRUE;
935
936 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
937 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
938 {
939 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
940 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
941 }
942 if (end_comment_pending == -1)
943 {
944 /* Find last character in end-comment string */
945 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
946 p2++;
947 end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
948 }
949 break;
950 }
951 if (*p == COM_FIRST)
952 {
953 /*
954 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader
955 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
956 */
957 if (dir == BACKWARD)
958 lead_len = 0;
959 else
960 {
961 lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
962 lead_repl_len = 0;
963 }
964 break;
965 }
966 }
967 if (lead_len)
968 {
969 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
970 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
971 extra_len + 1);
972 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */
973
974 if (leader == NULL)
975 lead_len = 0;
976 else
977 {
978 STRNCPY(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
979 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
980
981 /*
982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
983 */
984 if (lead_repl != NULL)
985 {
986 int c = 0;
987 int off = 0;
988
989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
990 {
991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
992 c = *p;
993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
994 off = getdigits(&p);
995 }
996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */
997 {
998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1001 ;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001002 ++p;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001003
1004#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1007 {
1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1009 lead_repl_len);
1010 int old_size = 0;
1011 char_u *endp = p;
1012 int l;
1013
1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1015 {
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001017 old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1018 }
1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1020 if (l != 0)
1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1023 lead_len += l;
1024 }
1025#else
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1027 p = leader;
1028 else
1029 p -= lead_repl_len;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001030#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1034
1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1036 while (--p >= leader)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001037 {
1038#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1040
1041 if (l > 1)
1042 {
1043 p -= l;
1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1045 {
1046 p[1] = ' ';
1047 --l;
1048 }
1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1051 lead_len -= l;
1052 *p = ' ';
1053 }
1054 else
1055#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1057 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001058 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001059 }
1060 else /* left adjusted leader */
1061 {
1062 p = skipwhite(leader);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001063#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1066 * not to be overwritten. */
1067 {
1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1069 lead_repl_len);
1070 int i;
1071 int l;
1072
1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1074 {
1075 l = mb_ptr2len_check(p + i);
1076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1077 break;
1078 }
1079 if (i != lead_repl_len)
1080 {
1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1084 }
1085 }
1086#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1088
1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must
1091 * remain the same. */
1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1094 {
1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1097 {
1098 --lead_len;
1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1100 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1101 }
1102 else
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001103 {
1104#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1105 int l = mb_ptr2len_check(p);
1106
1107 if (l > 1)
1108 {
1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1110 {
1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with
1112 * two spaces */
1113 --l;
1114 *p++ = ' ';
1115 }
1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1117 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1118 lead_len -= l - 1;
1119 }
1120#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001122 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001123 }
1124 *p = NUL;
1125 }
1126
1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1129#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1130 || do_si
1131#endif
1132 )
1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1134
1135 /* Add the indent offset */
1136 if (newindent + off < 0)
1137 {
1138 off = -newindent;
1139 newindent = 0;
1140 }
1141 else
1142 newindent += off;
1143
1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1145 * alignment remains equal. */
1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1148 {
1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1151 break;
1152 --lead_len;
1153 --off;
1154 }
1155
1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1157 * extra space */
1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1159 extra_space = FALSE;
1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 }
1162
1163 if (extra_space)
1164 {
1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1167 }
1168
1169 newcol = lead_len;
1170
1171 /*
1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1173 * is in the comment leader
1174 */
1175 if (newindent
1176#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1177 || did_si
1178#endif
1179 )
1180 {
1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1182 {
1183 --lead_len;
1184 --newcol;
1185 ++leader;
1186 }
1187 }
1188
1189 }
1190#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1192#endif
1193 }
1194 else if (comment_end != NULL)
1195 {
1196 /*
1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1200 * comment.
1201 */
1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai
1204#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1205 || do_si
1206#endif
1207 ))
1208 {
1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1212 {
1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1214 newindent = get_indent();
1215 }
1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1217 }
1218 }
1219 }
1220#endif
1221
1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1223 if (p_extra != NULL)
1224 {
1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */
1226
1227 /*
1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1229 * non-blank.
1230 *
1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1233 */
1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */
1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1237 {
1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1239#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1240 && (!enc_utf8
1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1242#endif
1243 )
1244 {
1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1246 replace_push(*p_extra);
1247 ++p_extra;
1248 ++less_cols_off;
1249 }
1250 }
1251 if (*p_extra != NUL)
1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1253
1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1256 }
1257
1258 if (p_extra == NULL)
1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */
1260
1261#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1263 if (lead_len)
1264 {
1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1266 p_extra = leader;
1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1268 less_cols -= lead_len;
1269 }
1270 else
1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */
1272#endif
1273
1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1275 if (dir == BACKWARD)
1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1277#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1279#endif
1280 {
1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1282 == FAIL)
1283 goto theend;
1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1285 * with markers. */
1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1287 did_append = TRUE;
1288 }
1289#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1290 else
1291 {
1292 /*
1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1294 */
1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1297 {
1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1300 */
1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */
1302 vr_lines_changed++;
1303 }
1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1307 did_append = FALSE;
1308 }
1309#endif
1310
1311 if (newindent
1312#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 || did_si
1314#endif
1315 )
1316 {
1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1318#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1319 if (did_si)
1320 {
1321 if (p_sr)
1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1324 }
1325#endif
1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1328 {
1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1330
1331 /*
1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end.
1335 */
1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1337 }
1338 else
1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1341
1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1343
1344 /*
1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1347 */
1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1350 replace_push(NUL);
1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1352#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1353 if (no_si)
1354 did_si = FALSE;
1355#endif
1356 }
1357
1358#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1359 /*
1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1362 */
1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1364 while (lead_len-- > 0)
1365 replace_push(NUL);
1366#endif
1367
1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1369
1370 if (dir == FORWARD)
1371 {
1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1373 {
1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */
1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1380 saved_line = NULL;
1381 if (did_append)
1382 {
1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1385 did_append = FALSE;
1386
1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1391 1L, (long)-less_cols);
1392 }
1393 else
1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1395 }
1396
1397 /*
1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may
1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1400 */
1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1402 }
1403 if (did_append)
1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1405
1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1409#endif
1410
1411#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1412 /*
1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1415 * normal INSERT mode.
1416 */
1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1418 {
1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */
1420 State = INSERT;
1421 }
1422 else
1423 vreplace_mode = 0;
1424#endif
1425#ifdef FEAT_LISP
1426 /*
1427 * May do lisp indenting.
1428 */
1429 if (!p_paste
1430# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1431 && leader == NULL
1432# endif
1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1435 {
1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1437 p = ml_get_curline();
1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1439 }
1440#endif
1441#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1442 /*
1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1444 */
1445 if (!p_paste
1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1447# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1449# endif
1450 )
1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1454 {
1455 do_c_expr_indent();
1456 p = ml_get_curline();
1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1458 }
1459#endif
1460#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1462 State = vreplace_mode;
1463#endif
1464
1465#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1466 /*
1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1470 */
1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1472 {
1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */
1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1475 if (p_extra == NULL)
1476 goto theend;
1477
1478 /* Put back original line */
1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1480
1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */
1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1483#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1485#endif
1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */
1487 vim_free(p_extra);
1488 next_line = NULL;
1489 }
1490#endif
1491
1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */
1493theend:
1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1495 vim_free(saved_line);
1496 vim_free(next_line);
1497 vim_free(allocated);
1498 return retval;
1499}
1500
1501#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1502/*
1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1505 * returned.
1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1507 * comment leader.
1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1509 */
1510 int
1511get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1512 char_u *line;
1513 char_u **flags;
1514 int backward;
1515{
1516 int i, j;
1517 int got_com = FALSE;
1518 int found_one;
1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */
1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */
1521 char_u *list;
1522
1523 i = 0;
1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */
1525 ++i;
1526
1527 /*
1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1529 */
1530 while (line[i])
1531 {
1532 /*
1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1534 */
1535 found_one = FALSE;
1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1537 {
1538 /*
1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one.
1540 * put string at start of string.
1541 */
1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */
1543 *flags = list;
1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1547 continue;
1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */
1549
1550 /*
1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1552 * nested comments.
1553 */
1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1555 continue;
1556
1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1559 continue;
1560
1561 /*
1562 * Line contents and string must match.
1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1565 * TABs and spaces).
1566 */
1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1568 {
1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1570 continue;
1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1572 ++string;
1573 }
1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1575 ;
1576 if (string[j] != NUL)
1577 continue;
1578
1579 /*
1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1582 */
1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1585 continue;
1586
1587 /*
1588 * We have found a match, stop searching.
1589 */
1590 i += j;
1591 got_com = TRUE;
1592 found_one = TRUE;
1593 break;
1594 }
1595
1596 /*
1597 * No match found, stop scanning.
1598 */
1599 if (!found_one)
1600 break;
1601
1602 /*
1603 * Include any trailing white space.
1604 */
1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1606 ++i;
1607
1608 /*
1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1610 */
1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1612 break;
1613 }
1614 return (got_com ? i : 0);
1615}
1616#endif
1617
1618/*
1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1620 */
1621 int
1622plines(lnum)
1623 linenr_T lnum;
1624{
1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1626}
1627
1628 int
1629plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1630 win_T *wp;
1631 linenr_T lnum;
1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1633{
1634#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1636 * is one line anyway. */
1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1638}
1639
1640 int
1641plines_nofill(lnum)
1642 linenr_T lnum;
1643{
1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1645}
1646
1647 int
1648plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1649 win_T *wp;
1650 linenr_T lnum;
1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1652{
1653#endif
1654 int lines;
1655
1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1657 return 1;
1658
1659#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1660 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1661 return 1;
1662#endif
1663
1664#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1668 return 1;
1669#endif
1670
1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1673 return (int)wp->w_height;
1674 return lines;
1675}
1676
1677/*
1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1680 */
1681 int
1682plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1683 win_T *wp;
1684 linenr_T lnum;
1685{
1686 char_u *s;
1687 long col;
1688 int width;
1689
1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */
1692 return 1;
1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1694
1695 /*
1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1697 * extra column.
1698 */
1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1700 col += 1;
1701
1702 /*
1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1704 */
1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1706 if (width <= 0)
1707 return 32000;
1708 if (col <= width)
1709 return 1;
1710 col -= width;
1711 width += win_col_off2(wp);
1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1713}
1714
1715/*
1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1718 */
1719 int
1720plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1721 win_T *wp;
1722 linenr_T lnum;
1723 long column;
1724{
1725 long col;
1726 char_u *s;
1727 int lines = 0;
1728 int width;
1729
1730#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1732 * is one line anyway. */
1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1734#endif
1735
1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1737 return lines + 1;
1738
1739#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1740 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1741 return lines + 1;
1742#endif
1743
1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1745
1746 col = 0;
1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1748 {
1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001750 mb_ptr_adv(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001751 }
1752
1753 /*
1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1758 * 'ts') -- webb.
1759 */
1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1762
1763 /*
1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1765 */
1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1767 if (width > 0)
1768 {
1769 lines += 1;
1770 if (col >= width)
1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1773 return lines;
1774 }
1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */
1776}
1777
1778 int
1779plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1780 win_T *wp;
1781 linenr_T first, last;
1782{
1783 int count = 0;
1784
1785 while (first <= last)
1786 {
1787#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1788 int x;
1789
1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1791 * that are maybe folded. */
1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1793 if (x > 0)
1794 {
1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1796 first += x;
1797 }
1798 else
1799#endif
1800 {
1801#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1802 if (first == wp->w_topline)
1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1804 else
1805#endif
1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1807 ++first;
1808 }
1809 }
1810 return (count);
1811}
1812
1813#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1814/*
1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte.
1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1817 */
1818 void
1819ins_bytes(p)
1820 char_u *p;
1821{
1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1823}
1824#endif
1825
1826#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1828/*
1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1831 */
1832 void
1833ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1834 char_u *p;
1835 int len;
1836{
1837 int i;
1838# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1839 int n;
1840
1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1842 {
1843 n = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p + i);
1844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1845 }
1846# else
1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1848 ins_char(p[i]);
1849# endif
1850}
1851#endif
1852
1853/*
1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1858 * convert bytes to a character.
1859 */
1860 void
1861ins_char(c)
1862 int c;
1863{
1864#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1866 int n;
1867
1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1869
1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1872 if (buf[0] == 0)
1873 buf[0] = '\n';
1874
1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1876}
1877
1878 void
1879ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1880 char_u *buf;
1881 int charlen;
1882{
1883 int c = buf[0];
1884 int l, j;
1885#endif
1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */
1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1888 char_u *p;
1889 char_u *newp;
1890 char_u *oldp;
1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */
1892 colnr_T col;
1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1894 int i;
1895
1896#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */
1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1899 coladvance_force(getviscol());
1900#endif
1901
1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1905
1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1907 oldlen = 0;
1908#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1909 newlen = charlen;
1910#else
1911 newlen = 1;
1912#endif
1913
1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1915 {
1916#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1918 {
1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */
1920 colnr_T vcol;
1921 int old_list;
1922#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1923 char_u buf[2];
1924#endif
1925
1926 /*
1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1930 */
1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1934
1935 /*
1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to
1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1940 */
1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1942#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1943 buf[0] = c;
1944 buf[1] = NUL;
1945#endif
1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1948 {
1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1951 * position. */
1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1953 break;
1954#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1956#else
1957 ++oldlen;
1958#endif
1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1960 if (vcol > new_vcol)
1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1962 }
1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1964 }
1965 else
1966#endif
1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1968 {
1969 /* normal replace */
1970#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col);
1972#else
1973 oldlen = 1;
1974#endif
1975 }
1976
1977
1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1982 replace_push(NUL);
1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1984 {
1985#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1986 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1989 i += l;
1990#else
1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1992#endif
1993 }
1994 }
1995
1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1997 if (newp == NULL)
1998 return;
1999
2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2001 if (col > 0)
2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2003
2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2005 p = newp + col;
2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2008
2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2010#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2012 i = charlen;
2013#else
2014 *p = c;
2015 i = 1;
2016#endif
2017
2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2019 while (i < newlen)
2020 p[i++] = ' ';
2021
2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2024
2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2027
2028 /*
2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2030 * show the match for right parens and braces.
2031 */
2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2033 && msg_silent == 0
2034#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2035 && charlen == 1
2036#endif
2037 )
2038 showmatch(c);
2039
2040#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2042#endif
2043 {
2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2045#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2047#else
2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2049#endif
2050 }
2051 /*
2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2053 */
2054}
2055
2056/*
2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2060 */
2061 void
2062ins_str(s)
2063 char_u *s;
2064{
2065 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2067 int oldlen;
2068 colnr_T col;
2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2070
2071#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2073 coladvance_force(getviscol());
2074#endif
2075
2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2079
2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2081 if (newp == NULL)
2082 return;
2083 if (col > 0)
2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2090}
2091
2092/*
2093 * Delete one character under the cursor.
2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2096 *
2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2098 */
2099 int
2100del_char(fixpos)
2101 int fixpos;
2102{
2103#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2104 if (has_mbyte)
2105 {
2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2107 mb_adjust_cursor();
2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2109 return FAIL;
2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2111 }
2112#endif
2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2114}
2115
2116#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2117/*
2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2119 */
2120 int
2121del_chars(count, fixpos)
2122 long count;
2123 int fixpos;
2124{
2125 long bytes = 0;
2126 long i;
2127 char_u *p;
2128 int l;
2129
2130 p = ml_get_cursor();
2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2132 {
2133 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p);
2134 bytes += l;
2135 p += l;
2136 }
2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2138}
2139#endif
2140
2141/*
2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2145 *
2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2147 */
2148 int
2149del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2150 long count;
2151 int fixpos;
2152{
2153 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2154 colnr_T oldlen;
2155 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2156 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2157 int was_alloced;
2158 long movelen;
2159
2160 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2161 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2162
2163 /*
2164 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2165 */
2166 if (col >= oldlen)
2167 return FAIL;
2168
2169#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2170 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2171 * delete the last combining character. */
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002172 if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && utfc_ptr2len_check(oldp + col) >= count)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002173 {
2174 int c1, c2;
2175 int n;
2176
2177 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2178 if (c1 != NUL)
2179 {
2180 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2181 n = col;
2182 do
2183 {
2184 col = n;
2185 count = utf_ptr2len_check(oldp + n);
2186 n += count;
2187 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2188 fixpos = 0;
2189 }
2190 }
2191#endif
2192
2193 /*
2194 * When count is too big, reduce it.
2195 */
2196 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2197 if (movelen <= 1)
2198 {
2199 /*
2200 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2201 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2202 */
2203 if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2204 {
2205 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2206#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2207 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2208#endif
2209#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2210 if (has_mbyte)
2211 curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2212 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2213#endif
2214 }
2215 count = oldlen - col;
2216 movelen = 1;
2217 }
2218
2219 /*
2220 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2221 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2222 */
2223 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */
2224#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2225 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2226 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2227 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2228#endif
2229 if (was_alloced)
2230 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */
2231 else
2232 { /* need to allocate a new line */
2233 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2234 if (newp == NULL)
2235 return FAIL;
2236 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2237 }
2238 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2239 if (!was_alloced)
2240 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2241
2242 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2243 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2244
2245 return OK;
2246}
2247
2248/*
2249 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2250 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2251 *
2252 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2253 */
2254 int
2255truncate_line(fixpos)
2256 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2257{
2258 char_u *newp;
2259 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2260 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2261
2262 if (col == 0)
2263 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2264 else
2265 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2266
2267 if (newp == NULL)
2268 return FAIL;
2269
2270 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2271
2272 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2273 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2274
2275 /*
2276 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2277 */
2278 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2279 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2280
2281 return OK;
2282}
2283
2284/*
2285 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2286 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2287 */
2288 void
2289del_lines(nlines, undo)
2290 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */
2291 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2292{
2293 long n;
2294
2295 if (nlines <= 0)
2296 return;
2297
2298 /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2299 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2300 return;
2301
2302 for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2303 {
2304 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */
2305 break;
2306
2307 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2308 ++n;
2309
2310 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2311 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2312 break;
2313 }
2314 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2315 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2316
2317 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2318 check_cursor_lnum();
2319}
2320
2321 int
2322gchar_pos(pos)
2323 pos_T *pos;
2324{
2325 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2326
2327#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2328 if (has_mbyte)
2329 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2330#endif
2331 return (int)*ptr;
2332}
2333
2334 int
2335gchar_cursor()
2336{
2337#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2338 if (has_mbyte)
2339 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2340#endif
2341 return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2342}
2343
2344/*
2345 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2346 * It is directly written into the block.
2347 */
2348 void
2349pchar_cursor(c)
2350 int c;
2351{
2352 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2353 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2354}
2355
2356#if 0 /* not used */
2357/*
2358 * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2359 */
2360 void
2361goto_endofbuf(pos)
2362 pos_T *pos;
2363{
2364 char_u *p;
2365
2366 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2367 pos->col = 0;
2368 p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2369 while (*p++)
2370 ++pos->col;
2371}
2372#endif
2373
2374/*
2375 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2376 * non-blank in the line.
2377 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2378 * the line.
2379 */
2380 int
2381inindent(extra)
2382 int extra;
2383{
2384 char_u *ptr;
2385 colnr_T col;
2386
2387 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2388 ++ptr;
2389 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2390 return TRUE;
2391 else
2392 return FALSE;
2393}
2394
2395/*
2396 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2397 */
2398 char_u *
2399skip_to_option_part(p)
2400 char_u *p;
2401{
2402 if (*p == ',')
2403 ++p;
2404 while (*p == ' ')
2405 ++p;
2406 return p;
2407}
2408
2409/*
2410 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2411 *
2412 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2413 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2414 */
2415 void
2416changed()
2417{
2418#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2419 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2420 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the
2421 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2422 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2423 return;
2424 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2425#endif
2426
2427 if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2428 {
2429 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2430
2431 change_warning(0);
2432 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2433 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2434 if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2435#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2436 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2437#endif
2438 )
2439 {
2440 ml_open_file(curbuf);
2441
2442 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2443 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2444 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2445 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2446 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2447 {
2448 out_flush();
2449 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2450 wait_return(TRUE);
2451 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2452 }
2453 }
2454 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002455 ml_setflags(curbuf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002456#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2457 check_status(curbuf);
2458#endif
2459#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2460 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2461#endif
2462 }
2463 ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002464}
2465
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002466static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2467static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002468static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2469
2470/*
2471 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2472 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2473 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2474 * - invalidates cached values
2475 */
2476 void
2477changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2478 linenr_T lnum;
2479 colnr_T col;
2480{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002481 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002482 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002483
2484#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2485 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2486 if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2487 {
2488 win_T *wp;
2489 linenr_T wlnum;
2490
2491 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2492 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2493 {
2494 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2495 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2496 if (wlnum > 0)
2497 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2498 }
2499 }
2500#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002501}
2502
2503 static void
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002504changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2505 buf_T *buf;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002506 linenr_T lnum;
2507{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002508 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002509 {
2510 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002511 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2512 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2513 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2514 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002515 }
2516 else
2517 {
2518 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002519 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2520 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2521 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2522 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002523 }
2524}
2525
2526/*
2527 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2528 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2529 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2530 */
2531 void
2532appended_lines(lnum, count)
2533 linenr_T lnum;
2534 long count;
2535{
2536 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2537}
2538
2539/*
2540 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2541 */
2542 void
2543appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2544 linenr_T lnum;
2545 long count;
2546{
2547 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2548 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2549}
2550
2551/*
2552 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2553 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2554 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2555 */
2556 void
2557deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2558 linenr_T lnum;
2559 long count;
2560{
2561 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2562}
2563
2564/*
2565 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2566 */
2567 void
2568deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2569 linenr_T lnum;
2570 long count;
2571{
2572 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2573 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2574}
2575
2576/*
2577 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2578 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2579 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2580 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2581 * - invalidate cached values
2582 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2583 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2584 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2585 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2586 */
2587 void
2588changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2589 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2590 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */
2591 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2592 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2593{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002594 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2595
2596#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2597 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2598 {
2599 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2600 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2601 * displaying. */
2602 win_T *wp;
2603 linenr_T wlnum;
2604
2605 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2606 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2607 {
2608 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2609 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2610 if (wlnum > 0)
2611 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2612 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2613 }
2614 }
2615#endif
2616
2617 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2618}
2619
2620 static void
2621changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2622 buf_T *buf;
2623 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2624 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2625 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2626{
2627 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002628 {
2629 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002630 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2631 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2632 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002633 {
2634 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002635 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2636 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2637 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002638 }
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002639 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2640 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2641 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002642 }
2643 else
2644 {
2645 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002646 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2647 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2648 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2649 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002650 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651}
2652
2653 static void
2654changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2655 linenr_T lnum;
2656 colnr_T col;
2657 linenr_T lnume;
2658 long xtra;
2659{
2660 win_T *wp;
2661 int i;
2662#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2663 int cols;
2664 pos_T *p;
2665 int add;
2666#endif
2667
2668 /* mark the buffer as modified */
2669 changed();
2670
2671 /* set the '. mark */
2672 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2673 {
2674 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2675 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2676
2677#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2678 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2679 * don't have an entry yet. */
2680 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2681 {
2682 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2683 add = TRUE;
2684 else
2685 {
2686 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2687 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids
2688 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2689 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2690 if (p->lnum != lnum)
2691 add = TRUE;
2692 else
2693 {
2694 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2695 if (cols == 0)
2696 cols = 79;
2697 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2698 }
2699 }
2700 if (add)
2701 {
2702 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2703 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new
2704 * position in the changelist. */
2705 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2706
2707 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2708 {
2709 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2710 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2711 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2712 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2713 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2714 {
2715 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2716 * this buffer. */
2717 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2718 --wp->w_changelistidx;
2719 }
2720 }
2721 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2722 {
2723 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2724 * at the end it stays at the end. */
2725 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2726 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2727 ++wp->w_changelistidx;
2728 }
2729 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2730 }
2731 }
2732 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2733 curbuf->b_last_change;
2734 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2735 * takes you back to it. */
2736 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2737#endif
2738 }
2739
2740 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2741 {
2742 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2743 {
2744 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2745 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2746 wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2747
2748 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2749 * values for the cursor. */
2750#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2751 /*
2752 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because
2753 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2754 */
2755 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2756
2757 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2758 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2759 * might be displayed differently.
2760 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2761 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2762 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2763 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2764 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2765 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2766 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2767 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2768
2769 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2770 * compare with the first line in that range. */
2771 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2772 {
2773 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2774 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2775 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2776 }
2777#endif
2778
2779 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2780 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2781 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2782 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2783 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2784 {
2785 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2786 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2787 approximate_botline_win(wp);
2788 }
2789
2790 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2791 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2792 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying
2793 * after the change. */
2794 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2795 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2796 {
2797 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2798 {
2799 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2800 {
2801 /* line included in change */
2802 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2803 }
2804 else if (xtra != 0)
2805 {
2806 /* line below change */
2807 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2808#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2809 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2810#endif
2811 }
2812 }
2813#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2814 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2815 {
2816 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2817 * may need to be redrawn */
2818 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2819 }
2820#endif
2821 }
2822 }
2823 }
2824
2825 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2826 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2827 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2828 must_redraw = VALID;
2829}
2830
2831/*
2832 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2833 */
2834 void
2835unchanged(buf, ff)
2836 buf_T *buf;
2837 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */
2838{
2839 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2840 {
2841 buf->b_changed = 0;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002842 ml_setflags(buf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002843 if (ff)
2844 save_file_ff(buf);
2845#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2846 check_status(buf);
2847#endif
2848#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2849 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2850#endif
2851 }
2852 ++buf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002853#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2854 netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2855#endif
2856}
2857
2858#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2859/*
2860 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2861 * need to be updated
2862 */
2863 void
2864check_status(buf)
2865 buf_T *buf;
2866{
2867 win_T *wp;
2868
2869 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2870 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2871 {
2872 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2873 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2874 must_redraw = VALID;
2875 }
2876}
2877#endif
2878
2879/*
2880 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2881 * Don't do this for autocommands.
2882 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2883 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but b_did_warn
2884 * will be TRUE.
2885 */
2886 void
2887change_warning(col)
2888 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2889 mode and 'showmode' is on */
2890{
2891 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2892 && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2893#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2894 && !autocmd_busy
2895#endif
2896 && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2897 {
2898#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2899 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2900 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2901 return;
2902#endif
2903 /*
2904 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2905 * be after the mode message.
2906 */
2907 msg_start();
2908 if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2909 msg_col = col;
Bram Moolenaar2df6dcc2004-07-12 15:53:54 +00002910 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002911 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2912 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2913 msg_clr_eos();
2914 (void)msg_end();
2915 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2916 {
2917 out_flush();
2918 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2919 }
2920 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2921 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */
2922 if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2923 showmode();
2924 }
2925}
2926
2927/*
2928 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2929 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2930 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2931 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2932 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2933 *
2934 * return the 'y' or 'n'
2935 */
2936 int
2937ask_yesno(str, direct)
2938 char_u *str;
2939 int direct;
2940{
2941 int r = ' ';
2942 int save_State = State;
2943
2944 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2945 settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2946 ++no_wait_return;
2947#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2948 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
2949#endif
2950 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2951#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2952 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */
2953#endif
2954 ++no_mapping;
2955 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2956
2957 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2958 {
2959 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2960 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2961 if (direct)
2962 r = get_keystroke();
2963 else
2964 r = safe_vgetc();
2965 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2966 r = 'n';
2967 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */
2968 out_flush();
2969 }
2970 --no_wait_return;
2971 State = save_State;
2972#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2973 setmouse();
2974#endif
2975 --no_mapping;
2976 --allow_keys;
2977
2978 return r;
2979}
2980
2981/*
2982 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2983 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2984 * button (used at the more prompt).
2985 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2986 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2987 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2988 */
2989 int
2990get_keystroke()
2991{
2992#define CBUFLEN 151
2993 char_u buf[CBUFLEN];
2994 int len = 0;
2995 int n;
2996 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2997
2998 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */
2999 for (;;)
3000 {
3001 cursor_on();
3002 out_flush();
3003
3004 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3005 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3006 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And
3007 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3008 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3009 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3010 if (n > 0)
3011 {
3012 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3013 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3014 len += n;
3015 }
3016
3017 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3018 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3019 continue;
3020 /* found a termcode: adjust length */
3021 if (n > 0)
3022 len = n;
3023 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */
3024 continue;
3025
3026 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3027 n = buf[0];
3028 if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3029 {
3030 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3031 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3032 || n == K_IGNORE
3033#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3034 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3035 || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3036 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3037 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3038 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3039 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3040 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3041 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3042 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3043 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3044 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3045 || n == K_MOUSEUP
3046 || n == K_X1MOUSE
3047 || n == K_X1DRAG
3048 || n == K_X1RELEASE
3049 || n == K_X2MOUSE
3050 || n == K_X2DRAG
3051 || n == K_X2RELEASE
3052# ifdef FEAT_GUI
3053 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3054 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3055# endif
3056#endif
3057 )
3058 {
3059 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3060 mod_mask = buf[2];
3061 len -= 3;
3062 if (len > 0)
3063 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3064 continue;
3065 }
3066 }
3067#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3068 if (has_mbyte)
3069 {
3070 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3071 continue; /* more bytes to get */
3072 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3073 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3074 }
3075#endif
3076#ifdef UNIX
3077 if (n == intr_char)
3078 n = ESC;
3079#endif
3080 break;
3081 }
3082
3083 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3084 return n;
3085}
3086
3087/*
3088 * get a number from the user
3089 */
3090 int
3091get_number(colon)
3092 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */
3093{
3094 int n = 0;
3095 int c;
3096
3097 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3098 * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3099 if (msg_silent != 0)
3100 return 0;
3101
3102#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3103 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
3104#endif
3105 ++no_mapping;
3106 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3107 for (;;)
3108 {
3109 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3110 c = safe_vgetc();
3111 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3112 {
3113 n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3114 msg_putchar(c);
3115 }
3116 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3117 {
3118 n /= 10;
3119 MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3120 }
3121 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3122 {
3123 stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3124 if (!exmode_active)
3125 cmdline_row = msg_row;
3126 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */
3127 do_redraw = FALSE;
3128 break;
3129 }
3130 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3131 break;
3132 }
3133 --no_mapping;
3134 --allow_keys;
3135 return n;
3136}
3137
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003138/*
3139 * Ask the user to enter a number.
3140 */
3141 int
3142prompt_for_number()
3143{
3144 int i;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003145 int save_cmdline_row;
3146 int save_State;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003147
3148 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
3149 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003150
3151 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */
3152 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3153 cmdline_row = Rows - 1;
3154 save_State = State;
3155 State = CMDLINE;
3156
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003157 i = get_number(TRUE);
3158 if (KeyTyped) /* don't call wait_return() now */
3159 {
3160 msg_putchar('\n');
3161 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3162 need_wait_return = FALSE;
3163 msg_didany = FALSE;
3164 }
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003165 else
3166 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3167 State = save_State;
3168
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003169 return i;
3170}
3171
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003172 void
3173msgmore(n)
3174 long n;
3175{
3176 long pn;
3177
3178 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003179 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3180 return;
3181
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003182 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3183 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3184 * then "put" reports the last action. */
3185 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3186 return;
3187
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003188 if (n > 0)
3189 pn = n;
3190 else
3191 pn = -n;
3192
3193 if (pn > p_report)
3194 {
3195 if (pn == 1)
3196 {
3197 if (n > 0)
3198 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3199 else
3200 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3201 }
3202 else
3203 {
3204 if (n > 0)
3205 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3206 else
3207 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3208 }
3209 if (got_int)
3210 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3211 if (msg(msg_buf))
3212 {
3213 set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3214 keep_msg_attr = 0;
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003215 keep_msg_more = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003216 }
3217 }
3218}
3219
3220/*
3221 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3222 */
3223 void
3224beep_flush()
3225{
3226 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3227 {
3228 flush_buffers(FALSE);
3229 vim_beep();
3230 }
3231}
3232
3233/*
3234 * give a warning for an error
3235 */
3236 void
3237vim_beep()
3238{
3239 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3240 {
3241 if (p_vb
3242#ifdef FEAT_GUI
3243 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3244 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3245 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3246#endif
3247 )
3248 {
3249 out_str(T_VB);
3250 }
3251 else
3252 {
3253#ifdef MSDOS
3254 /*
3255 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3256 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3257 * where the beeps don't overlap.
3258 */
3259 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3260 {
3261 out_char(BELL);
3262 beep_count = 1;
3263 }
3264 else
3265 ++beep_count;
3266#else
3267 out_char(BELL);
3268#endif
3269 }
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +00003270
3271 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3272 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3273 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3274 {
3275 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3276 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3277 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003278 }
3279}
3280
3281/*
3282 * To get the "real" home directory:
3283 * - get value of $HOME
3284 * For Unix:
3285 * - go to that directory
3286 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3287 * This also works with mounts and links.
3288 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3289 */
3290static char_u *homedir = NULL;
3291
3292 void
3293init_homedir()
3294{
3295 char_u *var;
3296
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003297 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3298 vim_free(homedir);
3299 homedir = NULL;
3300
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003301#ifdef VMS
3302 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3303#else
3304 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3305#endif
3306
3307 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */
3308 var = NULL;
3309
3310#ifdef WIN3264
3311 /*
3312 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3313 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3314 * when $HOME is being set.
3315 */
3316 if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3317 {
3318 char_u *p;
3319 char_u *exp;
3320
3321 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3322 if (p != NULL)
3323 {
3324 STRNCPY(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3325 NameBuff[p - (var + 1)] = NUL;
3326 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3327 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3328 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3329 {
Bram Moolenaar555b2802005-05-19 21:08:39 +00003330 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003331 var = NameBuff;
3332 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3333 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3334 }
3335 }
3336 }
3337
3338 /*
3339 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3340 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT
3341 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3342 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these.
3343 */
3344 if (var == NULL)
3345 {
3346 char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3347
3348 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3349 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3350 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3351 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3352 {
3353 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3354 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3355 {
3356 var = NameBuff;
3357 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3358 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3359 }
3360 }
3361 }
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003362
3363# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3364 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3365 {
3366 int len;
3367 char_u *pp;
3368
3369 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3370 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3371 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3372 if (pp != NULL)
3373 {
3374 homedir = pp;
3375 return;
3376 }
3377 }
3378# endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003379#endif
3380
3381#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3382 /*
3383 * Default home dir is C:/
3384 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3385 */
3386 if (var == NULL)
3387 var = "C:/";
3388#endif
3389 if (var != NULL)
3390 {
3391#ifdef UNIX
3392 /*
3393 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves
3394 * links. Don't do it when we can't return.
3395 */
3396 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3397 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3398 {
3399 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3400 var = IObuff;
3401 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3402 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3403 }
3404#endif
3405 homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3406 }
3407}
3408
3409/*
3410 * Expand environment variable with path name.
3411 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3412 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3413 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3414 */
3415 void
3416expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3417 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3418 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3419 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3420{
3421 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE);
3422}
3423
3424 void
3425expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, esc)
3426 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3427 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3428 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3429 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3430{
3431 char_u *tail;
3432 int c;
3433 char_u *var;
3434 int copy_char;
3435 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3436 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3437
3438 src = skipwhite(src);
3439 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */
3440 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3441 {
3442 copy_char = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003443 if ((*src == '$'
3444#ifdef VMS
3445 && at_start
3446#endif
3447 )
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003448#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3449 || *src == '%'
3450#endif
3451 || (*src == '~' && at_start))
3452 {
3453 mustfree = FALSE;
3454
3455 /*
3456 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3457 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3458 */
3459 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */
3460 {
3461 tail = src + 1;
3462 var = dst;
3463 c = dstlen - 1;
3464
3465#ifdef UNIX
3466 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3467 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3468 {
3469 tail++; /* ignore '{' */
3470 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3471 *var++ = *tail++;
3472 }
3473 else
3474#endif
3475 {
3476 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3477#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3478 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3479#endif
3480 ))
3481 {
3482#ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */
3483 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3484 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3485#else
3486 *var++ = *tail++;
3487#endif
3488 }
3489 }
3490
3491#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3492# ifdef UNIX
3493 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3494# else
3495 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3496# endif
3497 var = NULL;
3498 else
3499 {
3500# ifdef UNIX
3501 if (src[1] == '{')
3502# else
3503 if (*src == '%')
3504#endif
3505 ++tail;
3506#endif
3507 *var = NUL;
3508 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3509#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3510 }
3511#endif
3512 }
3513 /* home directory */
3514 else if ( src[1] == NUL
3515 || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3516 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3517 {
3518 var = homedir;
3519 tail = src + 1;
3520 }
3521 else /* user directory */
3522 {
3523#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3524 /*
3525 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3526 */
3527 tail = src;
3528 var = dst;
3529 c = dstlen - 1;
3530 while ( c-- > 0
3531 && *tail
3532 && vim_isfilec(*tail)
3533 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3534 *var++ = *tail++;
3535 *var = NUL;
3536# ifdef UNIX
3537 /*
3538 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3539 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3540 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell
3541 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3542 */
3543# if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3544 {
3545 struct passwd *pw;
3546
3547 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3548 if (pw != NULL)
3549 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3550 else
3551 var = NULL;
3552 }
3553 if (var == NULL)
3554# endif
3555 {
3556 expand_T xpc;
3557
3558 ExpandInit(&xpc);
3559 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3560 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3561 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3562 ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3563 mustfree = TRUE;
3564 }
3565
3566# else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3567 /*
3568 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3569 * directories to search for the user account in.
3570 */
3571 {
3572 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3573 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr;
3574 struct stat st;
3575
3576 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3577 next_path = paths;
3578 while (*next_path)
3579 {
3580 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3581 next_path++);
3582 if (*next_path)
3583 *next_path++ = NUL;
3584 STRCPY(test, path);
3585 STRCAT(test, "/");
3586 STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3587 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3588 {
3589 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3590 STRCPY(var, test);
3591 mustfree = TRUE;
3592 break;
3593 }
3594 }
3595 }
3596# endif /* UNIX */
3597#else
3598 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3599 var = NULL;
3600 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */
3601#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3602 }
3603
3604#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3605 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3606 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3607 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3608 {
3609 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var);
3610
3611 if (p != NULL)
3612 {
3613 if (mustfree)
3614 vim_free(var);
3615 var = p;
3616 mustfree = TRUE;
3617 forward_slash(var);
3618 }
3619 }
3620#endif
3621
3622 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3623 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3624 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3625 {
3626 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3627
3628 if (p != NULL)
3629 {
3630 if (mustfree)
3631 vim_free(var);
3632 var = p;
3633 mustfree = TRUE;
3634 }
3635 }
3636
3637 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3638 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3639 {
3640 STRCPY(dst, var);
3641 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003642 c = STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003643 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3644 * with it, skip a character */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003645 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003646#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3647 && dst[-1] != ':'
3648#endif
3649 && vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3650 ++tail;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003651 dst += c;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003652 src = tail;
3653 copy_char = FALSE;
3654 }
3655 if (mustfree)
3656 vim_free(var);
3657 }
3658
3659 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */
3660 {
3661 /*
3662 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3663 */
3664 at_start = FALSE;
3665 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3666 {
3667 *dst++ = *src++;
3668 --dstlen;
3669 }
3670 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3671 at_start = TRUE;
3672 *dst++ = *src++;
3673 --dstlen;
3674 }
3675 }
3676 *dst = NUL;
3677}
3678
3679/*
3680 * Vim's version of getenv().
3681 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
Bram Moolenaar2f6b0b82005-03-08 22:43:10 +00003682 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003683 */
3684 char_u *
3685vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3686 char_u *name;
3687 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3688{
3689 char_u *p;
3690 char_u *pend;
3691 int vimruntime;
3692
3693#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3694 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3695 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3696 return homedir;
3697#endif
3698
3699 p = mch_getenv(name);
3700 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3701 p = NULL;
3702
3703 if (p != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003704 {
3705#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3706 if (enc_utf8)
3707 {
3708 int len;
3709 char_u *pp;
3710
3711 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3712 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3713 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3714 if (pp != NULL)
3715 {
3716 p = pp;
3717 *mustfree = TRUE;
3718 }
3719 }
3720#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003721 return p;
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003722 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003723
3724 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3725 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3726 return NULL;
3727
3728 /*
3729 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3730 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3731 */
3732 if (vimruntime
3733#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3734 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3735#endif
3736 )
3737 {
3738 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3739 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3740 p = NULL;
3741 if (p != NULL)
3742 {
3743 p = vim_version_dir(p);
3744 if (p != NULL)
3745 *mustfree = TRUE;
3746 else
3747 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003748
3749#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3750 if (enc_utf8)
3751 {
3752 int len;
3753 char_u *pp;
3754
3755 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions
3756 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3757 * characters. */
3758 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3759 if (pp != NULL)
3760 {
3761 if (mustfree)
3762 vim_free(p);
3763 p = pp;
3764 *mustfree = TRUE;
3765 }
3766 }
3767#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003768 }
3769 }
3770
3771 /*
3772 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3773 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3774 * - the executable name from argv[0]
3775 */
3776 if (p == NULL)
3777 {
3778 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3779 p = p_hf;
3780#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3781 /*
3782 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3783 */
3784 else
3785 p = exe_name;
3786#endif
3787 if (p != NULL)
3788 {
3789 /* remove the file name */
3790 pend = gettail(p);
3791
3792 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3793 if (p == p_hf)
3794 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3795
3796#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3797# ifdef MACOS_X
3798 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3799 if (p == exe_name)
3800 {
3801 char_u *pend1;
3802 char_u *pend2;
3803
3804 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3805 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3806 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3807 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3808 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3809 if (pend2 == pend)
3810 pend = pend1;
3811 }
3812# endif
3813 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3814 if (p == exe_name)
3815 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3816#endif
3817
3818 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3819 if (!vimruntime)
3820 {
3821 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3822 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3823 }
3824
3825 /* remove trailing path separator */
3826#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3827 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */
3828 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003829 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003830 --pend;
3831#endif
3832
3833 /* check that the result is a directory name */
3834 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3835
3836 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3837 {
3838 vim_free(p);
3839 p = NULL;
3840 }
3841 else
3842 {
3843#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3844 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3845 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3846 {
3847 vim_free(p);
3848 p = pend;
3849 }
3850#endif
3851 *mustfree = TRUE;
3852 }
3853 }
3854 }
3855
3856#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3857 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3858 * default_vimruntime_dir */
3859 if (p == NULL)
3860 {
3861 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3862 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3863 {
3864 p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3865 *mustfree = FALSE;
3866 }
3867 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3868 {
3869 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3870 *mustfree = TRUE;
3871 else
3872 {
3873 p = default_vim_dir;
3874 *mustfree = FALSE;
3875 }
3876 }
3877 }
3878#endif
3879
3880 /*
3881 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3882 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3883 */
3884 if (p != NULL)
3885 {
3886 if (vimruntime)
3887 {
3888 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3889 didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3890#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3891 {
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00003892 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003893
3894 if (buf != NULL)
3895 {
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003896 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3897 vim_free(buf);
3898 }
3899 }
3900#endif
3901 }
3902 else
3903 {
3904 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3905 didset_vim = TRUE;
3906 }
3907 }
3908 return p;
3909}
3910
3911/*
3912 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3913 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3914 */
3915 static char_u *
3916vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3917 char_u *vimdir;
3918{
3919 char_u *p;
3920
3921 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3922 return NULL;
3923 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3924 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3925 return p;
3926 vim_free(p);
3927 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3928 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3929 return p;
3930 vim_free(p);
3931 return NULL;
3932}
3933
3934/*
3935 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3936 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend".
3937 */
3938 static char_u *
3939remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3940 char_u *p;
3941 char_u *pend;
3942 char_u *name;
3943{
3944 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3945 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3946
3947 if (newend >= p
3948 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003949 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003950 return newend;
3951 return pend;
3952}
3953
3954#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3955/*
3956 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3957 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend".
3958 */
3959 static char_u *
3960remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
3961 char_u *p;
3962 char_u *pend;
3963 char_u *ext;
3964{
3965 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
3966 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3967
3968 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00003969 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend))
3970 mb_ptr_back(p, newend);
3971 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003972 return newend;
3973 return pend;
3974}
3975#endif
3976
3977/*
3978 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
3979 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
3980 * again soon.
3981 */
3982 char_u *
3983expand_env_save(src)
3984 char_u *src;
3985{
3986 char_u *p;
3987
3988 p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
3989 if (p != NULL)
3990 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
3991 return p;
3992}
3993
3994/*
3995 * Our portable version of setenv.
3996 */
3997 void
3998vim_setenv(name, val)
3999 char_u *name;
4000 char_u *val;
4001{
4002#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4003 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4004#else
4005 char_u *envbuf;
4006
4007 /*
4008 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4009 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed.
4010 */
4011 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4012 if (envbuf != NULL)
4013 {
4014 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4015 putenv((char *)envbuf);
4016 }
4017#endif
4018}
4019
4020#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4021/*
4022 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4023 */
4024/*ARGSUSED*/
4025 char_u *
4026get_env_name(xp, idx)
4027 expand_T *xp;
4028 int idx;
4029{
4030# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4031 /*
4032 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4033 */
4034 return NULL;
4035# else
4036# ifndef __WIN32__
4037 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4038 extern char **environ;
4039# endif
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004040# define ENVNAMELEN 100
4041 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN];
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004042 char_u *str;
4043 int n;
4044
4045 str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4046 if (str == NULL)
4047 return NULL;
4048
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004049 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004050 {
4051 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4052 break;
4053 name[n] = str[n];
4054 }
4055 name[n] = NUL;
4056 return name;
4057# endif
4058}
4059#endif
4060
4061/*
4062 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4063 * 'src'.
4064 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4065 */
4066 void
4067home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4068 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4069 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4070 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
4071 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
4072 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4073 spaces and commas in the file name. */
4074{
4075 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4076 size_t len;
4077 char_u *homedir_env;
4078 char_u *p;
4079
4080 if (src == NULL)
4081 {
4082 *dst = NUL;
4083 return;
4084 }
4085
4086 /*
4087 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4088 */
4089 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4090 {
4091 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4092 return;
4093 }
4094
4095 /*
4096 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4097 * "real" home directory.
4098 */
4099 if (homedir != NULL)
4100 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4101
4102#ifdef VMS
4103 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4104#else
4105 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4106#endif
4107
4108 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4109 homedir_env = NULL;
4110 if (homedir_env != NULL)
4111 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4112
4113 if (!one)
4114 src = skipwhite(src);
4115 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4116 {
4117 /*
4118 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4119 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4120 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4121 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4122 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4123 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4124 * er's home directory)).
4125 */
4126 p = homedir;
4127 len = dirlen;
4128 for (;;)
4129 {
4130 if ( len
4131 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4132 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4133 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4134 || src[len] == NUL))
4135 {
4136 src += len;
4137 if (--dstlen > 0)
4138 *dst++ = '~';
4139
4140 /*
4141 * If it's just the home directory, add "/".
4142 */
4143 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4144 *dst++ = '/';
4145 break;
4146 }
4147 if (p == homedir_env)
4148 break;
4149 p = homedir_env;
4150 len = envlen;
4151 }
4152
4153 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4154 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4155 *dst++ = *src++;
4156 /* skip separator */
4157 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4158 *dst++ = *src++;
4159 }
4160 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4161
4162 *dst = NUL;
4163}
4164
4165/*
4166 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4167 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4168 */
4169 char_u *
4170home_replace_save(buf, src)
4171 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4172 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4173{
4174 char_u *dst;
4175 unsigned len;
4176
4177 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4178 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */
4179 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4180 dst = alloc(len);
4181 if (dst != NULL)
4182 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4183 return dst;
4184}
4185
4186/*
4187 * Compare two file names and return:
4188 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file.
4189 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4190 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files.
4191 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist.
4192 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist.
4193 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4194 */
4195 int
4196fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4197 char_u *s1, *s2;
4198 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */
4199{
4200#ifdef UNIX
4201 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL];
4202 char_u full1[MAXPATHL];
4203 char_u full2[MAXPATHL];
4204 struct stat st1, st2;
4205 int r1, r2;
4206
4207 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4208 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4209 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4210 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4211 {
4212 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4213 if (checkname)
4214 {
4215 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4216 return FPC_SAMEX;
4217 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4218 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4219 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4220 return FPC_SAMEX;
4221 }
4222 return FPC_NOTX;
4223 }
4224 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4225 return FPC_DIFFX;
4226 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4227 return FPC_SAME;
4228 return FPC_DIFF;
4229#else
4230 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */
4231 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */
4232 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */
4233 int retval = FPC_DIFF;
4234 int r1, r2;
4235
4236 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4237 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4238 {
4239 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4240 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4241
4242 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4243 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4244 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4245
4246 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4247 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4248 {
4249 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4250 retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4251 else
4252 retval = FPC_NOTX;
4253 }
4254 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4255 retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4256 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4257 retval = FPC_DIFF;
4258 else
4259 retval = FPC_SAME;
4260 vim_free(exp1);
4261 }
4262 return retval;
4263#endif
4264}
4265
4266/*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004267 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4268 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004269 */
4270 char_u *
4271gettail(fname)
4272 char_u *fname;
4273{
4274 char_u *p1, *p2;
4275
4276 if (fname == NULL)
4277 return (char_u *)"";
4278 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */
4279 {
4280 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4281 p1 = p2 + 1;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004282 mb_ptr_adv(p2);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004283 }
4284 return p1;
4285}
4286
4287/*
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004288 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL
4289 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4290 * Always returns a valid pointer.
4291 */
4292 char_u *
4293gettail_sep(fname)
4294 char_u *fname;
4295{
4296 char_u *p;
4297 char_u *t;
4298
4299 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4300 t = gettail(fname);
4301 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4302 --t;
4303#ifdef VMS
4304 /* path separator is part of the path */
4305 ++t;
4306#endif
4307 return t;
4308}
4309
4310/*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004311 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4312 */
4313 char_u *
4314getnextcomp(fname)
4315 char_u *fname;
4316{
4317 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004318 mb_ptr_adv(fname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004319 if (*fname)
4320 ++fname;
4321 return fname;
4322}
4323
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004324/*
4325 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4326 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4327 * If there is no head, path is returned.
4328 */
4329 char_u *
4330get_past_head(path)
4331 char_u *path;
4332{
4333 char_u *retval;
4334
4335#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4336 /* may skip "c:" */
4337 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4338 retval = path + 2;
4339 else
4340 retval = path;
4341#else
4342# if defined(AMIGA)
4343 /* may skip "label:" */
4344 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4345 if (retval == NULL)
4346 retval = path;
4347# else /* Unix */
4348 retval = path;
4349# endif
4350#endif
4351
4352 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4353 ++retval;
4354
4355 return retval;
4356}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004357
4358/*
4359 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4360 */
4361 int
4362vim_ispathsep(c)
4363 int c;
4364{
4365#ifdef RISCOS
4366 return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4367#else
4368# ifdef UNIX
4369 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4370# else
4371# ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4372 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4373# else
4374# ifdef VMS
4375 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4376 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4377 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4378# else
4379# ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4380 return (c == ':');
4381# else /* Amiga */
4382 return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4383# endif
4384# endif /* VMS */
4385# endif
4386# endif
4387#endif /* RISC OS */
4388}
4389
4390#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4391/*
4392 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4393 */
4394 int
4395vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4396 int c;
4397{
4398#ifdef UNIX
4399 return (c == ':');
4400#else
4401 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */
4402#endif
4403}
4404#endif
4405
4406#if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4407 || defined(PROTO)
4408/*
4409 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4410 */
4411 int
4412vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4413 char_u *x, *y;
4414{
4415 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4416}
4417
4418 int
4419vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4420 char_u *x, *y;
4421 size_t len;
4422{
4423 while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4424 {
4425 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4426 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4427 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4428 break;
4429 ++x;
4430 ++y;
4431 --len;
4432 }
4433 if (len == 0)
4434 return 0;
4435 return (*x - *y);
4436}
4437#endif
4438
4439/*
4440 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4441 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4442 */
4443 char_u *
4444concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4445 char_u *fname1;
4446 char_u *fname2;
4447 int sep;
4448{
4449 char_u *dest;
4450
4451 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4452 if (dest != NULL)
4453 {
4454 STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4455 if (sep)
4456 add_pathsep(dest);
4457 STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4458 }
4459 return dest;
4460}
4461
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00004462#if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4463/*
4464 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4465 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4466 */
4467 char_u *
4468concat_str(str1, str2)
4469 char_u *str1;
4470 char_u *str2;
4471{
4472 char_u *dest;
4473 size_t l = STRLEN(str1);
4474
4475 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4476 if (dest != NULL)
4477 {
4478 STRCPY(dest, str1);
4479 STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4480 }
4481 return dest;
4482}
4483#endif
4484
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004485/*
4486 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4487 * separator.
4488 */
4489 void
4490add_pathsep(p)
4491 char_u *p;
4492{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004493 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004494 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4495}
4496
4497/*
4498 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4499 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4500 */
4501 char_u *
4502FullName_save(fname, force)
4503 char_u *fname;
4504 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4505 like a full path name */
4506{
4507 char_u *buf;
4508 char_u *new_fname = NULL;
4509
4510 if (fname == NULL)
4511 return NULL;
4512
4513 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4514 if (buf != NULL)
4515 {
4516 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4517 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4518 else
4519 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4520 vim_free(buf);
4521 }
4522 return new_fname;
4523}
4524
4525#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4526
4527static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4528
4529/*
4530 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4531 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4532 */
4533 pos_T *
4534find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4535 int ind_maxcomment;
4536{
4537 pos_T *pos;
4538 char_u *line;
4539 char_u *p;
4540
4541 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4542 return NULL;
4543
4544 /*
4545 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4546 */
4547 line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4548 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4549 p = skip_string(p);
4550 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4551 return NULL;
4552 return pos;
4553}
4554
4555/*
4556 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4557 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4558 */
4559 static char_u *
4560skip_string(p)
4561 char_u *p;
4562{
4563 int i;
4564
4565 /*
4566 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4567 */
4568 for ( ; ; ++p)
4569 {
4570 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4571 {
4572 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */
4573 break;
4574 i = 2;
4575 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */
4576 {
4577 ++i;
4578 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */
4579 ++i;
4580 }
4581 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */
4582 {
4583 p += i;
4584 continue;
4585 }
4586 }
4587 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */
4588 {
4589 for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4590 {
4591 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4592 ++p;
4593 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */
4594 break;
4595 }
4596 if (p[0] == '"')
4597 continue;
4598 }
4599 break; /* no string found */
4600 }
4601 if (!*p)
4602 --p; /* backup from NUL */
4603 return p;
4604}
4605#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4606
4607#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4608
4609/*
4610 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4611 */
4612 void
4613do_c_expr_indent()
4614{
4615# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4616 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4617 fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4618 else
4619# endif
4620 fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4621}
4622
4623/*
4624 * Functions for C-indenting.
4625 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4626 */
4627/*
4628 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4629 */
4630
4631static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4632static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4633static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4634static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4635static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4636static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4637static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4638static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4639static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4640static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4641static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4642static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4643static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4644static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4645static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4646static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4647static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4648static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4649static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4650static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4651static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4652static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4653static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4654static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4655static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4656static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4657static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4658static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4659static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4660static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4661
4662/*
4663 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4664 */
4665 static char_u *
4666cin_skipcomment(s)
4667 char_u *s;
4668{
4669 while (*s)
4670 {
4671 s = skipwhite(s);
4672 if (*s != '/')
4673 break;
4674 ++s;
4675 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4676 {
4677 s += STRLEN(s);
4678 break;
4679 }
4680 if (*s != '*')
4681 break;
4682 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */
4683 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4684 {
4685 s += 2;
4686 break;
4687 }
4688 }
4689 return s;
4690}
4691
4692/*
4693 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are
4694 * not considered code.
4695 */
4696 static int
4697cin_nocode(s)
4698 char_u *s;
4699{
4700 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4701}
4702
4703/*
4704 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4705 */
4706 static pos_T *
4707find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4708{
4709 static pos_T pos;
4710 char_u *line;
4711 char_u *p;
4712
4713 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4714 while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4715 {
4716 line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4717 p = skipwhite(line);
4718 if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4719 {
4720 pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4721 return &pos;
4722 }
4723 if (*p != NUL)
4724 break;
4725 }
4726 return NULL;
4727}
4728
4729/*
4730 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4731 */
4732 static int
4733cin_islabel_skip(s)
4734 char_u **s;
4735{
4736 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */
4737 return FALSE;
4738
4739 while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4740 (*s)++;
4741
4742 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4743
4744 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4745 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4746}
4747
4748/*
4749 * Recognize a label: "label:".
4750 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4751 */
4752 int
4753cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4754 int ind_maxcomment;
4755{
4756 char_u *s;
4757
4758 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4759
4760 /*
4761 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4762 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations.
4763 */
4764 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4765 return FALSE;
4766 if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4767 return FALSE;
4768
4769 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4770 {
4771 /*
4772 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4773 * label.
4774 */
4775 pos_T cursor_save;
4776 pos_T *trypos;
4777 char_u *line;
4778
4779 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4780 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4781 {
4782 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4783
4784 /*
4785 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4786 */
4787 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4788 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4789 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4790
4791 line = ml_get_curline();
4792 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4793 continue;
4794 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4795 continue;
4796
4797 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4798 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4799 || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4800 || cin_iscase(line)
4801 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4802 return TRUE;
4803 return FALSE;
4804 }
4805 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4806 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */
4807 }
4808 return FALSE;
4809}
4810
4811/*
4812 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4813 * Q&D-Implementation:
4814 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4815 */
4816 static int
4817cin_isinit(void)
4818{
4819 char_u *s;
4820
4821 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4822
4823 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4824 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4825
4826 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4827 return TRUE;
4828
4829 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4830 return TRUE;
4831
4832 return FALSE;
4833}
4834
4835/*
4836 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4837 */
4838 int
4839cin_iscase(s)
4840 char_u *s;
4841{
4842 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4843 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4844 {
4845 for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4846 {
4847 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4848 if (*s == ':')
4849 {
4850 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4851 ++s;
4852 else
4853 return TRUE;
4854 }
4855 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4856 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */
4857 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4858 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */
4859 else if (*s == '"')
4860 return FALSE; /* stop at string */
4861 }
4862 return FALSE;
4863 }
4864
4865 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4866 return TRUE;
4867 return FALSE;
4868}
4869
4870/*
4871 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4872 */
4873 static int
4874cin_isdefault(s)
4875 char_u *s;
4876{
4877 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4878 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4879 && s[1] != ':');
4880}
4881
4882/*
4883 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4884 */
4885 int
4886cin_isscopedecl(s)
4887 char_u *s;
4888{
4889 int i;
4890
4891 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4892 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4893 i = 6;
4894 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4895 i = 9;
4896 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4897 i = 7;
4898 else
4899 return FALSE;
4900 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4901}
4902
4903/*
4904 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4905 * Return NULL if not found.
4906 * case 234: a = b;
4907 * ^
4908 */
4909 static char_u *
4910after_label(l)
4911 char_u *l;
4912{
4913 for ( ; *l; ++l)
4914 {
4915 if (*l == ':')
4916 {
4917 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4918 ++l;
4919 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4920 break;
4921 }
4922 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4923 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */
4924 }
4925 if (*l == NUL)
4926 return NULL;
4927 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4928 if (*l == NUL)
4929 return NULL;
4930 return l;
4931}
4932
4933/*
4934 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4935 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4936 */
4937 static int
4938get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */
4939 linenr_T lnum;
4940{
4941 char_u *l;
4942 pos_T fp;
4943 colnr_T col;
4944 char_u *p;
4945
4946 l = ml_get(lnum);
4947 p = after_label(l);
4948 if (p == NULL)
4949 return 0;
4950
4951 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
4952 fp.lnum = lnum;
4953 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4954 return (int)col;
4955}
4956
4957/*
4958 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
4959 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
4960 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf)
4961 * ^
4962 */
4963 static int
4964skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
4965 linenr_T lnum;
4966 char_u **pp;
4967 int ind_maxcomment;
4968{
4969 char_u *l;
4970 int amount;
4971 pos_T cursor_save;
4972
4973 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4974 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
4975 l = ml_get_curline();
4976 /* XXX */
4977 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
4978 {
4979 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
4980 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
4981 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */
4982 l = ml_get_curline();
4983 }
4984 else
4985 {
4986 amount = get_indent();
4987 l = ml_get_curline();
4988 }
4989 *pp = l;
4990
4991 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4992 return amount;
4993}
4994
4995/*
4996 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
4997 * int a, indent of "a"
4998 * static struct foo b, indent of "b"
4999 * enum bla c, indent of "c"
5000 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5001 */
5002 static int
5003cin_first_id_amount()
5004{
5005 char_u *line, *p, *s;
5006 int len;
5007 pos_T fp;
5008 colnr_T col;
5009
5010 line = ml_get_curline();
5011 p = skipwhite(line);
5012 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5013 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5014 {
5015 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5016 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5017 }
5018 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5019 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5020 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5021 p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5022 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5023 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5024 {
5025 s = skipwhite(p + len);
5026 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5027 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5028 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5029 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5030 p = s;
5031 }
5032 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5033 ;
5034 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5035 return 0;
5036
5037 p = skipwhite(p + len);
5038 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5039 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5040 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5041 return (int)col;
5042}
5043
5044/*
5045 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5046 * char *foo = "here";
5047 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5048 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5049 * foo = "asdf\
5050 * asdf\
5051 * here";
5052 */
5053 static int
5054cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5055 linenr_T lnum;
5056{
5057 char_u *line;
5058 char_u *s;
5059 colnr_T col;
5060 pos_T fp;
5061
5062 if (lnum > 1)
5063 {
5064 line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5065 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5066 return -1;
5067 }
5068
5069 line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5070 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5071 {
5072 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5073 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5074 else
5075 ++s;
5076 }
5077 if (*s != '=')
5078 return 0;
5079
5080 s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5081 if (cin_nocode(s))
5082 return 0;
5083
5084 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */
5085 ++s;
5086
5087 fp.lnum = lnum;
5088 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5089 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5090 return (int)col;
5091}
5092
5093/*
5094 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5095 */
5096 static int
5097cin_ispreproc(s)
5098 char_u *s;
5099{
5100 s = skipwhite(s);
5101 if (*s == '#')
5102 return TRUE;
5103 return FALSE;
5104}
5105
5106/*
5107 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5108 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the
5109 * start and return the line in "*pp".
5110 */
5111 static int
5112cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5113 char_u **pp;
5114 linenr_T *lnump;
5115{
5116 char_u *line = *pp;
5117 linenr_T lnum = *lnump;
5118 int retval = FALSE;
5119
5120 while (1)
5121 {
5122 if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5123 {
5124 retval = TRUE;
5125 *lnump = lnum;
5126 break;
5127 }
5128 if (lnum == 1)
5129 break;
5130 line = ml_get(--lnum);
5131 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5132 break;
5133 }
5134
5135 if (lnum != *lnump)
5136 *pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5137 return retval;
5138}
5139
5140/*
5141 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5142 */
5143 static int
5144cin_iscomment(p)
5145 char_u *p;
5146{
5147 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5148}
5149
5150/*
5151 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5152 */
5153 static int
5154cin_islinecomment(p)
5155 char_u *p;
5156{
5157 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5158}
5159
5160/*
5161 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5162 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5163 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5164 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5165 */
5166 static int
5167cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5168 char_u *s;
5169 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5170 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */
5171{
5172 char_u found_start = 0;
5173
5174 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5175
5176 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5177 found_start = *s;
5178
5179 while (*s)
5180 {
5181 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5182 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5183 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5184 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5185 && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5186 return *s;
5187
5188 if (*s)
5189 s++;
5190 }
5191 return found_start;
5192}
5193
5194/*
5195 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5196 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5197 * no semicolons anywhere.
5198 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5199 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must
5200 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5201 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5202 */
5203 static int
5204cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5205 char_u **sp;
5206 linenr_T first_lnum;
5207{
5208 char_u *s;
5209 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum;
5210 int retval = FALSE;
5211
5212 if (sp == NULL)
5213 s = ml_get(lnum);
5214 else
5215 s = *sp;
5216
5217 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5218 {
5219 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5220 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5221 else
5222 ++s;
5223 }
5224 if (*s != '(')
5225 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */
5226
5227 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5228 {
5229 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5230 {
5231 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5232 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5233 * #if defined(x) && \
5234 * defined(y)
5235 */
5236 lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5237 s = ml_get(lnum);
5238 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5239 retval = TRUE;
5240 goto done;
5241 }
5242 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5243 {
5244 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5245 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5246 break;
5247
5248 s = ml_get(++lnum);
5249 }
5250 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5251 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5252 else
5253 ++s;
5254 }
5255
5256done:
5257 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5258 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5259
5260 return retval;
5261}
5262
5263 static int
5264cin_isif(p)
5265 char_u *p;
5266{
5267 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5268}
5269
5270 static int
5271cin_iselse(p)
5272 char_u *p;
5273{
5274 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */
5275 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5276 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5277}
5278
5279 static int
5280cin_isdo(p)
5281 char_u *p;
5282{
5283 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5284}
5285
5286/*
5287 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5288 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5289 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5290 */
5291 static int
5292cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */
5293 char_u *p;
5294 linenr_T lnum;
5295 int ind_maxparen;
5296{
5297 pos_T cursor_save;
5298 pos_T *trypos;
5299 int retval = FALSE;
5300
5301 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5302 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */
5303 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5304 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5305 {
5306 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5307 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5308 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5309 p = ml_get_curline();
5310 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5311 {
5312 ++p;
5313 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5314 }
5315 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5316 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5317 retval = TRUE;
5318 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5319 }
5320 return retval;
5321}
5322
5323 static int
5324cin_isbreak(p)
5325 char_u *p;
5326{
5327 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5328}
5329
5330/* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5331 * constructor-initialization. eg:
5332 *
5333 * class MyClass :
5334 * baseClass <-- here
5335 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5336 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5337 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5338 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization)
5339 */
5340 static int
5341cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5342 char_u *line;
5343 colnr_T *col;
5344{
5345 char_u *s;
5346 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5347
5348 *col = 0;
5349
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00005350 s = skipwhite(line);
5351 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5352 return FALSE;
5353 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005354 if (*s == NUL)
5355 return FALSE;
5356
5357 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5358
5359 while(*s != NUL)
5360 {
5361 if (s[0] == ':')
5362 {
5363 if (s[1] == ':')
5364 {
5365 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5366 * initialization any more */
5367 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5368 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5369 }
5370 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5371 {
5372 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5373 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5374 cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5375 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5376 *col = 0;
5377 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5378 }
5379 else
5380 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5381 }
5382 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5383 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5384 {
5385 class_or_struct = TRUE;
5386 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5387
5388 if (*s == 'c')
5389 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5390 else
5391 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5392 }
5393 else
5394 {
5395 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5396 {
5397 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5398 }
5399 else if (s[0] == ')')
5400 {
5401 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5402 * something like "):" */
5403 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5404 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5405 }
5406 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5407 {
5408 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5409 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5410 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5411 }
5412 else if (*col == 0)
5413 {
5414 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5415 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5416
5417 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5418 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5419 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5420 }
5421
5422 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5423 }
5424 }
5425
5426 return cpp_base_class;
5427}
5428
5429/*
5430 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5431 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments.
5432 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5433 */
5434 static int
5435cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5436 char_u *s;
5437 char_u *find;
5438 char_u *ignore;
5439{
5440 char_u *p = s;
5441 char_u *r;
5442 int len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5443
5444 while (*p != NUL)
5445 {
5446 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5447 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5448 {
5449 r = skipwhite(p + len);
5450 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5451 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5452 if (cin_nocode(r))
5453 return TRUE;
5454 }
5455 if (*p != NUL)
5456 ++p;
5457 }
5458 return FALSE;
5459}
5460
5461/*
5462 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5463 * Return the column found.
5464 */
5465 static int
5466cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5467 pos_T *trypos;
5468{
5469 char_u *line;
5470 char_u *p;
5471
5472 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5473 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5474 {
5475 if (cin_iscomment(p))
5476 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5477 else
5478 {
5479 p = skip_string(p);
5480 ++p;
5481 }
5482 }
5483 return (int)(p - line);
5484}
5485
5486/*
5487 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5488 * Return NULL if no match found.
5489 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5490 * work. */
5491/* foo() */
5492/* { */
5493/* } */
5494
5495 static pos_T *
5496find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5497 int ind_maxcomment;
5498{
5499 pos_T cursor_save;
5500 pos_T *trypos;
5501 pos_T *pos;
5502 static pos_T pos_copy;
5503
5504 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5505 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5506 {
5507 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5508 trypos = &pos_copy;
5509 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5510 pos = NULL;
5511 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5512 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5513 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5514 break;
5515 if (pos != NULL)
5516 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5517 }
5518 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5519 return trypos;
5520}
5521
5522/*
5523 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5524 * Return NULL of no match found.
5525 */
5526 static pos_T *
5527find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5528 int ind_maxparen;
5529 int ind_maxcomment;
5530{
5531 pos_T cursor_save;
5532 pos_T *trypos;
5533 static pos_T pos_copy;
5534
5535 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5536 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5537 {
5538 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5539 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5540 trypos = NULL;
5541 else
5542 {
5543 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5544 trypos = &pos_copy;
5545 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5546 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5547 trypos = NULL;
5548 }
5549 }
5550 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5551 return trypos;
5552}
5553
5554/*
5555 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5556 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a
5557 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5558 * looking a few lines further.
5559 */
5560 static int
5561corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5562 int ind_maxparen;
5563 pos_T *startpos;
5564{
5565 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5566
5567 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5568 return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5569 return ind_maxparen;
5570}
5571
5572/*
5573 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5574 * line "l".
5575 */
5576 static int
5577find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5578 char_u *l;
5579 int start, end;
5580{
5581 int i;
5582 int retval = FALSE;
5583 int open_count = 0;
5584
5585 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */
5586
5587 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5588 {
5589 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5590 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */
5591 if (l[i] == start)
5592 ++open_count;
5593 else if (l[i] == end)
5594 {
5595 if (open_count > 0)
5596 --open_count;
5597 else
5598 {
5599 curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5600 retval = TRUE;
5601 }
5602 }
5603 }
5604 return retval;
5605}
5606
5607 int
5608get_c_indent()
5609{
5610 /*
5611 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5612 * block should be
5613 */
5614 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5615
5616 /*
5617 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5618 * line is imagined to be.
5619 */
5620 int ind_open_imag = 0;
5621
5622 /*
5623 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5624 * an opening brace.
5625 */
5626 int ind_no_brace = 0;
5627
5628 /*
5629 * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5630 */
5631 int ind_first_open = 0;
5632
5633 /*
5634 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5635 * located
5636 */
5637 int ind_open_extra = 0;
5638
5639 /*
5640 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5641 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5642 * brace should be located
5643 */
5644 int ind_close_extra = 0;
5645
5646 /*
5647 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5648 * column is imagined to be
5649 */
5650 int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5651
5652 /*
5653 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5654 */
5655 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5656
5657 /*
5658 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5659 */
5660 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5661
5662 /*
5663 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5664 */
5665 int ind_case_break = 0;
5666
5667 /*
5668 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5669 * should be located
5670 */
5671 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5672
5673 /*
5674 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5675 */
5676 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5677
5678 /*
5679 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5680 */
5681 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5682
5683 /*
5684 * amount a function type spec should be indented
5685 */
5686 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5687
5688 /*
5689 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5690 * should be indented
5691 */
5692 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5693
5694 /*
5695 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5696 * should be located
5697 */
5698 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5699
5700 /*
5701 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5702 */
5703 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5704
5705 /*
5706 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5707 * itself is also unclosed
5708 */
5709 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5710
5711 /*
5712 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5713 * unclosed parentheses.
5714 */
5715 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5716
5717 /*
5718 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5719 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5720 * context (for very long lines).
5721 */
5722 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5723
5724 /*
5725 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5726 * an unclosed parentheses.
5727 */
5728 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5729
5730 /*
5731 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5732 * opening parentheses.
5733 */
5734 int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5735
5736 /*
5737 * Extra indent for comments.
5738 */
5739 int ind_comment = 0;
5740
5741 /*
5742 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5743 */
5744 int ind_in_comment = 3;
5745
5746 /*
5747 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5748 * after the comment opener.
5749 */
5750 int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5751
5752 /*
5753 * max lines to search for an open paren
5754 */
5755 int ind_maxparen = 20;
5756
5757 /*
5758 * max lines to search for an open comment
5759 */
5760 int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5761
5762 /*
5763 * handle braces for java code
5764 */
5765 int ind_java = 0;
5766
5767 /*
5768 * handle blocked cases correctly
5769 */
5770 int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5771
5772 pos_T cur_curpos;
5773 int amount;
5774 int scope_amount;
5775 int cur_amount;
5776 colnr_T col;
5777 char_u *theline;
5778 char_u *linecopy;
5779 pos_T *trypos;
5780 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL;
5781 pos_T our_paren_pos;
5782 char_u *start;
5783 int start_brace;
5784#define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5785#define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */
5786#define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */
5787 linenr_T ourscope;
5788 char_u *l;
5789 char_u *look;
5790 char_u terminated;
5791 int lookfor;
5792#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0
5793#define LOOKFOR_IF 1
5794#define LOOKFOR_DO 2
5795#define LOOKFOR_CASE 3
5796#define LOOKFOR_ANY 4
5797#define LOOKFOR_TERM 5
5798#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6
5799#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7
5800#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8
5801#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9
5802#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10
5803
5804 int whilelevel;
5805 linenr_T lnum;
5806 char_u *options;
5807 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */
5808 int divider;
5809 int n;
5810 int iscase;
5811 int lookfor_break;
5812 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */
5813
5814 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5815 {
5816 l = options++;
5817 if (*options == '-')
5818 ++options;
5819 n = getdigits(&options);
5820 divider = 0;
5821 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5822 {
5823 fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5824 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5825 {
5826 ++options;
5827 if (divider)
5828 divider *= 10;
5829 else
5830 divider = 10;
5831 }
5832 }
5833 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5834 {
5835 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5836 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5837 else
5838 {
5839 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5840 if (divider)
5841 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5842 }
5843 ++options;
5844 }
5845 if (l[1] == '-')
5846 n = -n;
5847 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5848 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5849 switch (*l)
5850 {
5851 case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5852 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5853 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5854 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5855 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5856 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5857 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5858 case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5859 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5860 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5861 case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5862 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5863 case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5864 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5865 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5866 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5867 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5868 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5869 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5870 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5871 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5872 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5873 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5874 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5875 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5876 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5877 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5878 case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5879 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5880 }
5881 }
5882
5883 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5884 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5885
5886 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5887 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5888 * ml_get is valid! */
5889 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5890 if (linecopy == NULL)
5891 return 0;
5892
5893 /*
5894 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5895 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5896 * inserting new stuff.
5897 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5898 * check for that.
5899 */
5900 if ((State & INSERT)
5901 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5902 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5903 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5904
5905 theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5906
5907 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5908
5909 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5910
5911 /*
5912 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5913 */
5914 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5915 {
5916 amount = 0;
5917 }
5918
5919 /*
5920 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too.
5921 */
5922 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */
5923 {
5924 amount = 0;
5925 }
5926
5927 /*
5928 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5929 * previous line, lineup with that one.
5930 */
5931 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5932 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5933 {
5934 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5935 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5936 amount = col;
5937 }
5938
5939 /*
5940 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
5941 * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
5942 */
5943 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
5944 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5945 {
5946 int lead_start_len = 2;
5947 int lead_middle_len = 1;
5948 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */
5949 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
5950 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
5951 char_u *p;
5952 int start_align = 0;
5953 int start_off = 0;
5954 int done = FALSE;
5955
5956 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5957 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5958 amount = col;
5959
5960 p = curbuf->b_p_com;
5961 while (*p != NUL)
5962 {
5963 int align = 0;
5964 int off = 0;
5965 int what = 0;
5966
5967 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
5968 {
5969 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
5970 what = *p++;
5971 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
5972 align = *p++;
5973 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
5974 off = getdigits(&p);
5975 else
5976 ++p;
5977 }
5978
5979 if (*p == ':')
5980 ++p;
5981 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
5982 if (what == COM_START)
5983 {
5984 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
5985 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
5986 start_off = off;
5987 start_align = align;
5988 }
5989 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
5990 {
5991 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
5992 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
5993 }
5994 else if (what == COM_END)
5995 {
5996 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
5997 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
5998 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
5999 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6000 {
6001 done = TRUE;
6002 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6003 {
6004 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6005 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If
6006 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6007 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */
6008 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6009 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6010 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6011 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6012 lead_middle_len) == 0)
6013 {
6014 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6015 break;
6016 }
6017 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6018 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6019 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6020 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6021 continue;
6022 }
6023 if (start_off != 0)
6024 amount += start_off;
6025 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006026 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6027 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006028 break;
6029 }
6030
6031 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6032 * with the middle comment */
6033 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6034 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6035 {
6036 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6037 /* XXX */
6038 if (off != 0)
6039 amount += off;
6040 else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006041 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6042 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006043 done = TRUE;
6044 break;
6045 }
6046 }
6047 }
6048
6049 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6050 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6051 * with the first character of the comment text.
6052 */
6053 if (done)
6054 ;
6055 else if (theline[0] == '*')
6056 amount += 1;
6057 else
6058 {
6059 /*
6060 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6061 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO"
6062 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6063 * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6064 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6065 */
6066 amount = -1;
6067 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6068 {
6069 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */
6070 continue;
6071 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6072 break;
6073 }
6074 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */
6075 {
6076 if (!ind_in_comment2)
6077 {
6078 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6079 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6080 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */
6081 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6082 }
6083 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6084 amount = col;
6085 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6086 amount += ind_in_comment;
6087 }
6088 }
6089 }
6090
6091 /*
6092 * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6093 */ /* XXX */
6094 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6095 && ind_java == 0)
6096 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6097 || trypos != NULL)
6098 {
6099 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6100 {
6101 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is
6102 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6103 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6104 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6105 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6106 trypos = NULL;
6107 else
6108 tryposBrace = NULL;
6109 }
6110
6111 if (trypos != NULL)
6112 {
6113 /*
6114 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6115 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6116 */
6117 amount = -1;
6118 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6119 our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6120 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6121 {
6122 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6123 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */
6124 continue;
6125 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6126 continue;
6127 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6128
6129 /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6130 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6131 {
6132 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6133 continue;
6134 }
6135
6136 /* XXX */
6137 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6138 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6139 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6140 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6141 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6142 {
6143 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6144
6145 if (theline[0] == ')')
6146 {
6147 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6148 cur_amount = amount;
6149 amount = -1;
6150 }
6151 break;
6152 }
6153 }
6154
6155 /*
6156 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6157 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6158 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6159 */
6160 if (amount == -1)
6161 {
6162 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6163 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6164 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6165 {
6166 /*
6167 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6168 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6169 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6170 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6171 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6172 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6173 * lines).
6174 */
6175 if (theline[0] != ')')
6176 {
6177 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6178 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6179 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6180 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6181 {
6182 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6183 * for each additional level */
6184 n = 1;
6185 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6186 {
6187 switch (l[col])
6188 {
6189 case '(':
6190 case '{': ++n;
6191 break;
6192
6193 case ')':
6194 case '}': if (n > 1)
6195 --n;
6196 break;
6197 }
6198 }
6199
6200 our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6201 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6202 }
6203 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6204 our_paren_pos.col++;
6205 else
6206 {
6207 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6208 while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6209 col++;
6210 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */
6211 our_paren_pos.col = col;
6212 else
6213 our_paren_pos.col++;
6214 }
6215 }
6216
6217 /*
6218 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6219 * if we did the above "if".
6220 */
6221 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6222 {
6223 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6224 if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6225 cur_amount = col;
6226 }
6227 }
6228
6229 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6230 {
6231 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6232 }
6233 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6234 && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6235 {
6236 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6237 amount = cur_amount;
6238 }
6239 else
6240 {
6241 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6242 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6243 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6244 {
6245 --our_paren_pos.col;
6246 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6247 {
6248 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6249 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6250 break;
6251 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6252 col = MAXCOL;
6253 break;
6254 }
6255 }
6256
6257 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6258 * braces */
6259 if (col == MAXCOL)
6260 amount += ind_unclosed;
6261 else
6262 {
6263 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6264 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6265 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6266 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6267 amount += ind_unclosed2;
6268 else
6269 amount += ind_unclosed;
6270 }
6271 /*
6272 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6273 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6274 * lines:
6275 * func_long_name( if (x
6276 * arg && yy
6277 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here
6278 */
6279 if (cur_amount < amount)
6280 amount = cur_amount;
6281 }
6282 }
6283
6284 /* add extra indent for a comment */
6285 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6286 amount += ind_comment;
6287 }
6288
6289 /*
6290 * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6291 */
6292 else
6293 {
6294 trypos = tryposBrace;
6295
6296 ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6297 start = ml_get(ourscope);
6298
6299 /*
6300 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6301 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6302 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6303 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6304 */
6305 look = skipwhite(start);
6306 if (*look == '{')
6307 {
6308 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6309 amount = col;
6310 if (*start == '{')
6311 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6312 else
6313 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6314 }
6315 else
6316 {
6317 /*
6318 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6319 * line. if so, find the start of the line.
6320 */
6321 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6322
6323 /*
6324 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6325 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6326 */
6327 lnum = ourscope;
6328 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6329 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6330 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6331 lnum = trypos->lnum;
6332
6333 /*
6334 * It could have been something like
6335 * case 1: if (asdf &&
6336 * ldfd) {
6337 * }
6338 */
6339 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6340 amount = get_indent();
6341 else
6342 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6343
6344 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6345 }
6346
6347 /*
6348 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6349 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room
6350 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6351 */
6352 if (theline[0] == '}')
6353 {
6354 /*
6355 * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6356 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so.
6357 */
6358 amount += ind_close_extra;
6359 }
6360 else
6361 {
6362 /*
6363 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6364 * to match it with.
6365 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6366 * to match it with.
6367 */
6368 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6369 if (cin_iselse(theline))
6370 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6371 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6372 /* XXX */
6373 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6374 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6375 {
6376 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6377 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6378 ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6379 {
6380 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6381 goto theend;
6382 }
6383 }
6384
6385 /*
6386 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6387 * failed to find a matching "if").
6388 * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6389 * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6390 */
6391
6392 /*
6393 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6394 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the
6395 * location for ind_open_extra.
6396 */
6397
6398 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */
6399 {
6400 amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6401 }
6402 else
6403 {
6404 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */
6405 amount += ind_open_imag;
6406 else
6407 {
6408 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6409 amount -= ind_open_extra;
6410 if (amount < 0)
6411 amount = 0;
6412 }
6413 }
6414
6415 lookfor_break = FALSE;
6416
6417 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */
6418 {
6419 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */
6420 amount += ind_case;
6421 }
6422 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */
6423 {
6424 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */
6425 amount += ind_scopedecl;
6426 }
6427 else
6428 {
6429 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */
6430 lookfor_break = TRUE;
6431
6432 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6433 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */
6434 }
6435 scope_amount = amount;
6436 whilelevel = 0;
6437
6438 /*
6439 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up
6440 * with that.
6441 *
6442 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6443 * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6444 * that opens the block.
6445 */
6446 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6447 for (;;)
6448 {
6449 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6450 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6451
6452 /*
6453 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6454 * up with it.
6455 */
6456 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6457 {
6458 /* we reached end of scope:
6459 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6460 * go further back:
6461 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6462 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6463 * declaration:
6464 * int x,
6465 * here; <-- add ind_continuation
6466 */
6467 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6468 {
6469 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6470 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6471 < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6472 {
6473 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6474 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6475 * initialization) */
6476 if (cont_amount > 0)
6477 amount = cont_amount;
6478 else
6479 amount += ind_continuation;
6480 break;
6481 }
6482
6483 l = ml_get_curline();
6484
6485 /*
6486 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6487 * comment.
6488 */
6489 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6490 if (trypos != NULL)
6491 {
6492 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6493 continue;
6494 }
6495
6496 /*
6497 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6498 */
6499 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6500 continue;
6501
6502 if (cin_nocode(l))
6503 continue;
6504
6505 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6506
6507 /*
6508 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6509 * function declaration, we are done
6510 * (it's a variable declaration).
6511 */
6512 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6513 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6514 {
6515 /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6516 * it is a continued variable initialization.
6517 * don't add extra indent.
6518 * TODO: does not work, if a function
6519 * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6520 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6521 */
6522 if (terminated == ',')
6523 break;
6524
6525 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6526 * we are done.
6527 */
6528 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6529 break;
6530
6531 /* nothing useful found */
6532 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6533 continue;
6534 }
6535
6536 if (terminated != ';')
6537 {
6538 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6539 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6540 * will take us back to the start of the line.
6541 */ /* XXX */
6542 trypos = NULL;
6543 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6544 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6545 ind_maxcomment);
6546
6547 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6548 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6549
6550 if (trypos != NULL)
6551 {
6552 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6553 continue;
6554 }
6555 }
6556
6557 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6558 * like in
6559 * int a,
6560 * b;
6561 */
6562 if (cont_amount > 0)
6563 amount = cont_amount;
6564 else
6565 amount += ind_continuation;
6566 }
6567 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6568 {
6569 if (cont_amount > 0)
6570 amount = cont_amount;
6571 else
6572 amount += ind_continuation;
6573 }
6574 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6575 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6576 {
6577 amount = scope_amount;
6578 if (theline[0] == '{')
6579 amount += ind_open_extra;
6580 }
6581 break;
6582 }
6583
6584 /*
6585 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6586 */ /* XXX */
6587 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6588 {
6589 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6590 continue;
6591 }
6592
6593 l = ml_get_curline();
6594
6595 /*
6596 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6597 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6598 */
6599 iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6600 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6601 {
6602 /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6603 * declaration/initialization any longer */
6604 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6605 break;
6606
6607 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6608 * labels. */
6609 if (whilelevel > 0)
6610 continue;
6611
6612 /*
6613 * case xx:
6614 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation
6615 *-> here;
6616 */
6617 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6618 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6619 {
6620 if (cont_amount > 0)
6621 amount = cont_amount;
6622 else
6623 amount += ind_continuation;
6624 break;
6625 }
6626
6627 /*
6628 * case xx: <- line up with this case
6629 * x = 333;
6630 * case yy:
6631 */
6632 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6633 || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6634 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6635 {
6636 /*
6637 * Check that this case label is not for another
6638 * switch()
6639 */ /* XXX */
6640 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6641 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6642 {
6643 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6644 break;
6645 }
6646 continue;
6647 }
6648
6649 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */
6650
6651 /*
6652 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6653 * y = y + 1;
6654 * -> s = 99;
6655 *
6656 * case xx:
6657 * if (cond) <- line up with this line
6658 * y = y + 1;
6659 * -> s = 99;
6660 */
6661 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6662 {
6663 if (n)
6664 amount = n;
6665
6666 if (!lookfor_break)
6667 break;
6668 }
6669
6670 /*
6671 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x
6672 * -> y = y + 1;
6673 *
6674 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6675 * -> y = y + 1;
6676 */
6677 if (n)
6678 {
6679 amount = n;
6680 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6681 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6682 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6683 break;
6684 }
6685
6686 /*
6687 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6688 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6689 * switch label.
6690 * break; <- may line up with this line
6691 * case xx:
6692 * -> y = 1;
6693 */
6694 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */
6695 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6696 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6697 continue;
6698 }
6699
6700 /*
6701 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6702 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6703 */
6704 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6705 {
6706 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6707 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6708 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6709 continue;
6710 }
6711
6712 /*
6713 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6714 */
6715 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6716 {
6717 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6718 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6719 continue;
6720 }
6721
6722 /*
6723 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6724 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6725 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6726 * unlocked it)
6727 */
6728 l = ml_get_curline();
6729 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6730 || cin_nocode(l))
6731 continue;
6732
6733 /*
6734 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6735 * constructor initialization?
6736 */ /* XXX */
6737 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6738 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6739 {
6740 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6741 {
6742 if (cont_amount > 0)
6743 amount = cont_amount;
6744 else
6745 amount += ind_continuation;
6746 }
6747 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6748 {
6749 amount = get_indent();
6750 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6751 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6752 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6753 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6754 if (theline[0] != '{')
6755 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6756 }
6757 else
6758 {
6759 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6760 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6761 amount = (int)col;
6762 }
6763 break;
6764 }
6765 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6766 {
6767 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6768 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6769 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6770 break;
6771 else
6772 continue;
6773 }
6774
6775 /*
6776 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6777 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6778 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6779 * 123,
6780 * sizeof
6781 * here
6782 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6783 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6784 * (indented).
6785 */
6786 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6787
6788 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6789 && terminated == ','))
6790 {
6791 /*
6792 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6793 * go back to the line that starts it so
6794 * we can get the right prevailing indent
6795 * if ( foo &&
6796 * bar )
6797 */
6798 /*
6799 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6800 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6801 */
6802 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6803 trypos = find_match_paren(
6804 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6805 ind_maxcomment);
6806
6807 /*
6808 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6809 * braces.
6810 */
6811 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6812 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6813
6814 if (trypos != NULL)
6815 {
6816 /*
6817 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
6818 * handled above.
6819 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
6820 * asdf)
6821 */
6822 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6823 l = ml_get_curline();
6824 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6825 {
6826 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6827 continue;
6828 }
6829 }
6830
6831 /*
6832 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6833 * indent from
6834 * char *usethis = "bla\
6835 * bla",
6836 * here;
6837 */
6838 if (terminated == ',')
6839 {
6840 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6841 {
6842 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6843 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6844 break;
6845 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6846 }
6847 }
6848
6849 /*
6850 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6851 * ignoring any jump label. XXX
6852 */
6853 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6854 &l, ind_maxcomment);
6855
6856 /*
6857 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6858 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6859 * while (not)
6860 * -> {
6861 * }
6862 */
6863 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6864 && theline[0] == '{')
6865 {
6866 amount = cur_amount;
6867 /*
6868 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6869 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6870 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably:
6871 * { 1, 2 },
6872 * -> { 3, 4 }
6873 */
6874 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6875 amount += ind_open_extra;
6876
6877 if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6878 {
6879 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6880 * class declaration or initialization */
6881 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6882 continue;
6883 }
6884 break;
6885 }
6886
6887 /*
6888 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6889 * Also allow " } else".
6890 */
6891 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6892 {
6893 /*
6894 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6895 * with the last one.
6896 * if (cond)
6897 * 100 +
6898 * -> here;
6899 */
6900 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6901 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6902 {
6903 if (cont_amount > 0)
6904 amount = cont_amount;
6905 else
6906 amount += ind_continuation;
6907 break;
6908 }
6909
6910 /*
6911 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6912 * are finished.
6913 * while (not)
6914 * -> here;
6915 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6916 * before this is terminated.
6917 * yyy;
6918 * if (stat)
6919 * while (not)
6920 * xxx;
6921 * -> here;
6922 */
6923 amount = cur_amount;
6924 if (theline[0] == '{')
6925 amount += ind_open_extra;
6926 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6927 {
6928 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6929 break;
6930 }
6931
6932 /*
6933 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6934 * do, line up with the while()
6935 * do
6936 * x = 1;
6937 * -> here
6938 */
6939 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
6940 if (cin_isdo(l))
6941 {
6942 if (whilelevel == 0)
6943 break;
6944 --whilelevel;
6945 }
6946
6947 /*
6948 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
6949 * one between the "if" and the "else".
6950 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX
6951 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
6952 */
6953 if (cin_iselse(l)
6954 && whilelevel == 0
6955 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6956 == NULL
6957 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
6958 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
6959 break;
6960 }
6961
6962 /*
6963 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
6964 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
6965 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
6966 * the line before this one.
6967 */
6968 else
6969 {
6970 /*
6971 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
6972 * the last one.
6973 * c = 99 +
6974 * 100 +
6975 * -> here;
6976 */
6977 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6978 {
6979 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
6980 if (terminated == ',')
6981 amount += ind_continuation;
6982 break;
6983 }
6984
6985 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6986 {
6987 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
6988 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
6989 * declaration/initialization, if it is an
6990 * opening brace or we are looking just for
6991 * enumerations/initializations. */
6992 if (terminated == ',')
6993 {
6994 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
6995 break;
6996
6997 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6998 continue;
6999 }
7000
7001 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7002 * reduce indent. */
7003 if (amount > cur_amount)
7004 amount = cur_amount;
7005 }
7006 else
7007 {
7008 /*
7009 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7010 * line up with this line, remember its indent
7011 * 100 +
7012 * -> here;
7013 */
7014 amount = cur_amount;
7015
7016 /*
7017 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7018 * are in an initialization or enum
7019 * struct xxx =
7020 * {
7021 * sizeof a,
7022 * 124 };
7023 * or a normal possible continuation line.
7024 * but only, of no other statement has been found
7025 * yet.
7026 */
7027 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7028 {
7029 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7030 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7031 }
7032 else
7033 {
7034 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7035 && *l != NUL
7036 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7037 /* XXX */
7038 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7039 curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7040 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7041 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7042 }
7043 }
7044 }
7045 }
7046
7047 /*
7048 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7049 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7050 */
7051 /* XXX */
7052 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7053 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7054 {
7055 /*
7056 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7057 * with the last one.
7058 * while (cond);
7059 * 100 + <- line up with this one
7060 * -> here;
7061 */
7062 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7063 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7064 {
7065 if (cont_amount > 0)
7066 amount = cont_amount;
7067 else
7068 amount += ind_continuation;
7069 break;
7070 }
7071
7072 if (whilelevel == 0)
7073 {
7074 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7075 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7076 if (theline[0] == '{')
7077 amount += ind_open_extra;
7078 }
7079 ++whilelevel;
7080 }
7081
7082 /*
7083 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7084 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7085 * indent of that other statement.
7086 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7087 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7088 */
7089 else
7090 {
7091 /*
7092 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7093 * may be lined up with the case label.
7094 */
7095 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7096 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7097 {
7098 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7099 continue;
7100 }
7101
7102 /*
7103 * Handle "do {" line.
7104 */
7105 if (whilelevel > 0)
7106 {
7107 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7108 if (cin_isdo(l))
7109 {
7110 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7111 --whilelevel;
7112 continue;
7113 }
7114 }
7115
7116 /*
7117 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7118 * the amount for a continuation line.
7119 * x = 1;
7120 * y = foo +
7121 * -> here;
7122 * or
7123 * int x = 1;
7124 * int foo,
7125 * -> here;
7126 */
7127 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7128 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7129 {
7130 if (cont_amount > 0)
7131 amount = cont_amount;
7132 else
7133 amount += ind_continuation;
7134 break;
7135 }
7136
7137 /*
7138 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7139 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7140 * x = 1; x = 1;
7141 * if (asdf) y = 2;
7142 * while (asdf) ->here;
7143 * here;
7144 * ->foo;
7145 */
7146 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7147 {
7148 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7149 break;
7150 }
7151
7152 /*
7153 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7154 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7155 * a terminated line.
7156 */
7157 else
7158 {
7159 /*
7160 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7161 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7162 * the line. Helps for:
7163 * func(asdr,
7164 * asdfasdf);
7165 * here;
7166 */
7167term_again:
7168 l = ml_get_curline();
7169 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7170 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7171 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7172 {
7173 /*
7174 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
7175 * handled above.
7176 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
7177 * asdf)
7178 */
7179 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7180 l = ml_get_curline();
7181 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7182 {
7183 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7184 continue;
7185 }
7186 }
7187
7188 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7189 * with a statement after it.
7190 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position
7191 * stat;
7192 * }
7193 * case 2:
7194 * stat;
7195 * }
7196 */
7197 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7198
7199 /*
7200 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7201 * ignoring any jump label.
7202 */
7203 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7204 &l, ind_maxcomment);
7205
7206 if (theline[0] == '{')
7207 amount += ind_open_extra;
7208 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7209 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7210 amount -= ind_open_extra;
7211 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7212
7213 /*
7214 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7215 * that block.
7216 */
7217 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7218 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7219 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7220 != NULL) /* XXX */
7221 {
7222 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7223 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7224 /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7225 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7226 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7227 goto term_again;
7228 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7229 }
7230 }
7231 }
7232 }
7233 }
7234 }
7235
7236 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7237 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7238 amount += ind_comment;
7239 }
7240
7241 /*
7242 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7243 *
7244 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7245 * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7246 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7247 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7248 */
7249 else
7250 {
7251 /*
7252 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7253 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7254 * of a function
7255 */
7256
7257 if (theline[0] == '{')
7258 {
7259 amount = ind_first_open;
7260 }
7261
7262 /*
7263 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7264 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7265 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7266 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7267 */
7268 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7269 && !cin_nocode(theline)
7270 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7271 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7272 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7273 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7274 {
7275 amount = ind_func_type;
7276 }
7277 else
7278 {
7279 amount = 0;
7280 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7281
7282 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7283
7284 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7285 {
7286 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7287 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7288
7289 l = ml_get_curline();
7290
7291 /*
7292 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7293 */ /* XXX */
7294 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7295 {
7296 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7297 continue;
7298 }
7299
7300 /*
7301 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7302 * initialization?
7303 */ /* XXX */
7304 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7305 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7306 {
7307 if (col == 0)
7308 {
7309 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7310 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7311 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7312 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7313 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7314 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7315 }
7316 else
7317 {
7318 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7319 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7320 amount = (int)col;
7321 }
7322 break;
7323 }
7324
7325 /*
7326 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7327 */
7328 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7329 continue;
7330
7331 if (cin_nocode(l))
7332 continue;
7333
7334 /*
7335 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7336 * indentation:
7337 * int foo,
7338 * bar;
7339 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7340 * enum foobar
7341 * {
7342 * ...
7343 * } foo,
7344 * bar;
7345 */
7346 n = 0;
7347 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7348 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7349 {
7350 /* take us back to opening paren */
7351 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7352 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7353 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7354 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7355
7356 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7357 * back to the first line with a backslash:
7358 * char *foo = "bla\
7359 * bla",
7360 * here;
7361 */
7362 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7363 {
7364 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7365 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7366 break;
7367 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7368 }
7369
7370 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7371
7372 if (amount == 0)
7373 amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7374 if (amount == 0)
7375 amount = ind_continuation;
7376 break;
7377 }
7378
7379 /*
7380 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7381 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7382 */
7383 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */
7384 break;
7385 l = ml_get_curline();
7386
7387 /*
7388 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put
7389 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs".
7390 */
7391 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7392 break;
7393
7394 /* (matching {)
7395 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7396 * comments) align at column 0. For example:
7397 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7398 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7399 */
7400 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7401 break;
7402
7403 /*
7404 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7405 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7406 * parameters.
7407 */
7408 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7409 {
7410 amount = ind_param;
7411 break;
7412 }
7413
7414 /*
7415 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7416 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7417 * int foo,
7418 * bar;
7419 * indent_to_0 here;
7420 */
7421 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7422 {
7423 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7424 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7425 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7426 break;
7427 l = ml_get_curline();
7428 }
7429
7430 /*
7431 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7432 * use the indent of this line.
7433 *
7434 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7435 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7436 */
7437 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7438
7439 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7440 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7441 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7442 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7443 break;
7444 }
7445
7446 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7447 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7448 amount += ind_comment;
7449
7450 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7451 * "asdfasdf\
7452 * here";
7453 * char *foo = "asdf\
7454 * here";
7455 */
7456 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7457 {
7458 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7459 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7460 {
7461 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7462 if (cur_amount > 0)
7463 amount = cur_amount;
7464 else if (cur_amount == 0)
7465 amount += ind_continuation;
7466 }
7467 }
7468 }
7469 }
7470
7471theend:
7472 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7473 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7474
7475 vim_free(linecopy);
7476
7477 if (amount < 0)
7478 return 0;
7479 return amount;
7480}
7481
7482 static int
7483find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7484 int lookfor;
7485 linenr_T ourscope;
7486 int ind_maxparen;
7487 int ind_maxcomment;
7488{
7489 char_u *look;
7490 pos_T *theirscope;
7491 char_u *mightbeif;
7492 int elselevel;
7493 int whilelevel;
7494
7495 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7496 {
7497 elselevel = 1;
7498 whilelevel = 0;
7499 }
7500 else
7501 {
7502 elselevel = 0;
7503 whilelevel = 1;
7504 }
7505
7506 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7507
7508 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7509 {
7510 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7511 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7512
7513 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7514 if (cin_iselse(look)
7515 || cin_isif(look)
7516 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */
7517 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7518 {
7519 /*
7520 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7521 * we must be out of scope...
7522 */
7523 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */
7524 if (theirscope == NULL)
7525 break;
7526
7527 /*
7528 * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7529 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7530 * out of luck too.
7531 */
7532 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7533 break;
7534
7535 /*
7536 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7537 * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7538 * different scope...
7539 */
7540 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7541 continue;
7542
7543 /*
7544 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7545 * then we need to go back to another if, so
7546 * increment elselevel
7547 */
7548 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7549 if (cin_iselse(look))
7550 {
7551 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7552 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7553 ++elselevel;
7554 continue;
7555 }
7556
7557 /*
7558 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7559 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX
7560 */
7561 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7562 {
7563 ++whilelevel;
7564 continue;
7565 }
7566
7567 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7568 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7569 if (cin_isif(look))
7570 {
7571 elselevel--;
7572 /*
7573 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7574 * get in the way.
7575 */
7576 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7577 whilelevel = 0;
7578 }
7579
7580 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7581 if (cin_isdo(look))
7582 whilelevel--;
7583
7584 /*
7585 * if we've used up all the elses, then
7586 * this must be the if that we want!
7587 * match the indent level of that if.
7588 */
7589 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7590 {
7591 return OK;
7592 }
7593 }
7594 }
7595 return FAIL;
7596}
7597
7598# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7599/*
7600 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7601 */
7602 int
7603get_expr_indent()
7604{
7605 int indent;
7606 pos_T pos;
7607 int save_State;
7608
7609 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7610 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7611 ++sandbox;
7612 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7613 --sandbox;
7614
7615 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7616 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7617 * command. */
7618 save_State = State;
7619 State = INSERT;
7620 curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7621 check_cursor();
7622 State = save_State;
7623
7624 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7625 if (indent < 0)
7626 indent = get_indent();
7627
7628 return indent;
7629}
7630# endif
7631
7632#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7633
7634#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7635
7636static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7637
7638 static int
7639lisp_match(p)
7640 char_u *p;
7641{
7642 char_u buf[LSIZE];
7643 int len;
7644 char_u *word = p_lispwords;
7645
7646 while (*word != NUL)
7647 {
7648 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7649 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7650 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7651 return TRUE;
7652 }
7653 return FALSE;
7654}
7655
7656/*
7657 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7658 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7659 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7660 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
7661 *
7662 * TODO:
7663 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7664 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7665 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7666 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7667 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7668 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007669 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7670 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007671 */
7672 int
7673get_lisp_indent()
7674{
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007675 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007676 int amount;
7677 char_u *that;
7678 colnr_T col;
7679 colnr_T firsttry;
7680 int parencount, quotecount;
7681 int vi_lisp;
7682
7683 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7684 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7685
7686 realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7687 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7688
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007689 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7690 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7691 else
7692 {
7693 paren = *pos;
7694 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7695 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7696 pos = &paren;
7697 }
7698 if (pos != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007699 {
7700 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7701 * line that is at the same () level. */
7702 amount = -1;
7703 parencount = 0;
7704
7705 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7706 {
7707 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7708 continue;
7709 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7710 {
7711 if (*that == ';')
7712 {
7713 while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7714 ++that;
7715 continue;
7716 }
7717 if (*that == '\\')
7718 {
7719 if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7720 ++that;
7721 continue;
7722 }
7723 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7724 {
7725 that++;
7726 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7727 ++that;
7728 }
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007729 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007730 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007731 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007732 --parencount;
7733 }
7734 if (parencount == 0)
7735 {
7736 amount = get_indent();
7737 break;
7738 }
7739 }
7740
7741 if (amount == -1)
7742 {
7743 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7744 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7745 col = pos->col;
7746
7747 that = ml_get_curline();
7748
7749 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7750 amount = 2;
7751 else
7752 {
7753 amount = 0;
7754 while (*that && col)
7755 {
7756 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7757 col--;
7758 }
7759
7760 /*
7761 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7762 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7763 *
7764 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1))
7765 * (...)) of (...))
7766 */
7767
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007768 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7769 && lisp_match(that + 1))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007770 amount += 2;
7771 else
7772 {
7773 that++;
7774 amount++;
7775 firsttry = amount;
7776
7777 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7778 {
7779 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7780 ++that;
7781 }
7782
7783 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7784 {
7785 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7786 * argument if it is more than one line */
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007787 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007788 firsttry++;
7789
7790 parencount = 0;
7791 quotecount = 0;
7792
7793 if (vi_lisp
7794 || (*that != '"'
7795 && *that != '\''
7796 && *that != '#'
7797 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7798 {
7799 while (*that
7800 && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7801 || quotecount
7802 || parencount)
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007803 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007804 && !quotecount
7805 && !parencount
7806 && vi_lisp)))
7807 {
7808 if (*that == '"')
7809 quotecount = !quotecount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007810 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7811 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007812 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007813 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7814 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007815 --parencount;
7816 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7817 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7818 (colnr_T)amount);
7819 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7820 (colnr_T)amount);
7821 }
7822 }
7823 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7824 {
7825 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7826 that++;
7827 }
7828 if (!*that || *that == ';')
7829 amount = firsttry;
7830 }
7831 }
7832 }
7833 }
7834 }
7835 else
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007836 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007837
7838 curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7839
7840 return amount;
7841}
7842#endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7843
7844 void
7845prepare_to_exit()
7846{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00007847#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7848 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7849 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7850 * problems. */
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00007851 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7852#endif
7853
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007854#ifdef FEAT_GUI
7855 if (gui.in_use)
7856 {
7857 gui.dying = TRUE;
7858 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */
7859 }
7860 else
7861#endif
7862 {
7863 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7864
7865 /*
7866 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7867 * screen (if there are two screens).
7868 */
7869 settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7870#ifdef WIN3264
7871 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7872#endif
7873 stoptermcap();
7874 out_flush();
7875 }
7876}
7877
7878/*
7879 * Preserve files and exit.
7880 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7881 */
7882 void
7883preserve_exit()
7884{
7885 buf_T *buf;
7886
7887 prepare_to_exit();
7888
7889 out_str(IObuff);
7890 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7891 out_flush();
7892
7893 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */
7894
7895 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7896 {
7897 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7898 {
7899 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7900 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7901 out_flush();
7902 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
7903 break;
7904 }
7905 }
7906
7907 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7908
7909 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7910
7911 getout(1);
7912}
7913
7914/*
7915 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7916 */
7917 int
7918vim_fexists(fname)
7919 char_u *fname;
7920{
7921 struct stat st;
7922
7923 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7924 return FALSE;
7925 return TRUE;
7926}
7927
7928/*
7929 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7930 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7931 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7932 * time, because it can be a system call.
7933 */
7934
7935#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7936# ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
7937# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
7938# else
7939# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
7940# endif
7941#endif
7942
7943static int breakcheck_count = 0;
7944
7945 void
7946line_breakcheck()
7947{
7948 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
7949 {
7950 breakcheck_count = 0;
7951 ui_breakcheck();
7952 }
7953}
7954
7955/*
7956 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
7957 */
7958 void
7959fast_breakcheck()
7960{
7961 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
7962 {
7963 breakcheck_count = 0;
7964 ui_breakcheck();
7965 }
7966}
7967
7968/*
7969 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
7970 * 'wildignore'.
7971 */
7972 int
7973expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
7974 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
7975 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
7976 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
7977 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
7978 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */
7979{
7980 int retval;
7981 int i, j;
7982 char_u *p;
7983 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */
7984
7985 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
7986
7987 /* When keeping all matches, return here */
7988 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
7989 return retval;
7990
7991#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
7992 /*
7993 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
7994 */
7995 if (*p_wig)
7996 {
7997 char_u *ffname;
7998
7999 /* check all files in (*file)[] */
8000 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8001 {
8002 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8003 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */
8004 break;
8005# ifdef VMS
8006 vms_remove_version(ffname);
8007# endif
8008 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8009 {
8010 /* remove this matching file from the list */
8011 vim_free((*file)[i]);
8012 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8013 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8014 --*num_file;
8015 --i;
8016 }
8017 vim_free(ffname);
8018 }
8019 }
8020#endif
8021
8022 /*
8023 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8024 */
8025 if (*num_file > 1)
8026 {
8027 non_suf_match = 0;
8028 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8029 {
8030 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8031 {
8032 /*
8033 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8034 * of the list.
8035 */
8036 p = (*file)[i];
8037 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8038 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8039 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8040 }
8041 }
8042 }
8043
8044 return retval;
8045}
8046
8047/*
8048 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8049 */
8050 int
8051match_suffix(fname)
8052 char_u *fname;
8053{
8054 int fnamelen, setsuflen;
8055 char_u *setsuf;
8056#define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8057 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8058
8059 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8060 setsuflen = 0;
8061 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8062 {
8063 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8064 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8065 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8066 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8067 break;
8068 setsuflen = 0;
8069 }
8070 return (setsuflen != 0);
8071}
8072
8073#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8074
8075# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8076static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8077static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8078# endif
8079
8080# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8081/*
8082 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because
8083 * it's shared between these systems.
8084 */
8085# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8086# define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8087# else
8088# ifdef __BORLANDC__
8089# define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8090# endif
8091# endif
8092
8093/*
8094 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8095 */
8096 static int _cdecl
8097pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8098{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00008099 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008100}
8101
8102# ifndef WIN3264
8103 static void
8104namelowcpy(
8105 char_u *d,
8106 char_u *s)
8107{
8108# ifdef DJGPP
8109 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8110 while (*s)
8111 *d++ = *s++;
8112 else
8113# endif
8114 while (*s)
8115 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8116 *d = NUL;
8117}
8118# endif
8119
8120/*
8121 * Recursively build up a list of files in "gap" matching the first wildcard
8122 * in `path'. Called by expand_wildcards().
8123 * Return the number of matches found.
8124 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8125 * at "path[wildoff]".
8126 */
8127 static int
8128dos_expandpath(
8129 garray_T *gap,
8130 char_u *path,
8131 int wildoff,
8132 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8133{
8134 char_u *buf;
8135 char_u *path_end;
8136 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8137 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8138 int ok;
8139#ifdef WIN3264
8140 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb;
8141 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8142# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8143 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb;
8144 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8145# endif
8146#else
8147 struct ffblk fb;
8148#endif
8149 int matches;
8150 int starts_with_dot;
8151 int len;
8152 char_u *pat;
8153 regmatch_T regmatch;
8154 char_u *matchname;
8155
8156 /* make room for file name */
8157 buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8158 if (buf == NULL)
8159 return 0;
8160
8161 /*
8162 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8163 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8164 */
8165 p = buf;
8166 s = buf;
8167 e = NULL;
8168 path_end = path;
8169 while (*path_end != NUL)
8170 {
8171 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8172 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8173 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8174 *p++ = *path_end++;
8175 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8176 {
8177 if (e != NULL)
8178 break;
8179 s = p + 1;
8180 }
8181 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8182 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8183 e = p;
8184#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8185 if (has_mbyte)
8186 {
8187 len = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(path_end);
8188 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8189 p += len;
8190 path_end += len;
8191 }
8192 else
8193#endif
8194 *p++ = *path_end++;
8195 }
8196 e = p;
8197 *e = NUL;
8198
8199 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8200 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8201 * component. */
8202 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8203 if (rem_backslash(p))
8204 {
8205 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8206 --e;
8207 --s;
8208 }
8209
8210 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8211 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8212 if (pat == NULL)
8213 {
8214 vim_free(buf);
8215 return 0;
8216 }
8217
8218 /* compile the regexp into a program */
8219 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */
8220 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8221 vim_free(pat);
8222
8223 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8224 {
8225 vim_free(buf);
8226 return 0;
8227 }
8228
8229 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8230 matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8231
8232 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8233 STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8234#ifdef WIN3264
8235# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8236 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8237 {
8238 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the
8239 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8240 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8241 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8242 if (wn != NULL)
8243 {
8244 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8245 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8246 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8247 {
8248 vim_free(wn);
8249 wn = NULL;
8250 }
8251 }
8252 }
8253
8254 if (wn == NULL)
8255# endif
8256 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8257 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8258#else
8259 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8260 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8261 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8262#endif
8263
8264 while (ok)
8265 {
8266#ifdef WIN3264
8267# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8268 if (wn != NULL)
8269 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */
8270 else
8271# endif
8272 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8273#else
8274 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8275#endif
8276 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept
8277 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8278 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8279 && (matchname == NULL
8280 || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8281 {
8282#ifdef WIN3264
8283 STRCPY(s, p);
8284#else
8285 namelowcpy(s, p);
8286#endif
8287 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8288 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8289 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8290 {
8291 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8292 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8293 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags);
8294 }
8295 else
8296 {
8297 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8298 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8299 if (*path_end != 0)
8300 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8301 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8302 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8303 }
8304 }
8305
8306#ifdef WIN3264
8307# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8308 if (wn != NULL)
8309 {
8310 vim_free(p);
8311 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8312 }
8313 else
8314# endif
8315 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8316#else
8317 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8318#endif
8319
8320 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8321 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8322 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8323 {
8324 STRCPY(s, matchname);
8325#ifdef WIN3264
8326 FindClose(hFind);
8327# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8328 if (wn != NULL)
8329 {
8330 vim_free(wn);
8331 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8332 if (wn != NULL)
8333 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8334 }
8335 if (wn == NULL)
8336# endif
8337 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8338 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8339#else
8340 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8341 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8342#endif
8343 vim_free(matchname);
8344 matchname = NULL;
8345 }
8346 }
8347
8348#ifdef WIN3264
8349 FindClose(hFind);
8350# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8351 vim_free(wn);
8352# endif
8353#endif
8354 vim_free(buf);
8355 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8356 vim_free(matchname);
8357
8358 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8359 if (matches > 0)
8360 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8361 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8362 return matches;
8363}
8364
8365 int
8366mch_expandpath(
8367 garray_T *gap,
8368 char_u *path,
8369 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8370{
8371 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags);
8372}
8373# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8374
8375/*
8376 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8377 *
8378 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8379 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8380 *
8381 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not
8382 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8383 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of
8384 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later.
8385 */
8386 int
8387gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8388 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8389 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8390 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8391 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8392 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8393{
8394 int i;
8395 garray_T ga;
8396 char_u *p;
8397 static int recursive = FALSE;
8398 int add_pat;
8399
8400 /*
8401 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails,
8402 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always
8403 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise,
8404 * return FAIL.
8405 */
8406 if (recursive)
8407#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8408 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8409#else
8410 return FAIL;
8411#endif
8412
8413#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8414 /*
8415 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8416 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This
8417 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8418 * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8419 */
8420 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8421 {
8422 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8423# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8424 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8425# endif
8426 )
8427 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8428 }
8429#endif
8430
8431 recursive = TRUE;
8432
8433 /*
8434 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty.
8435 */
8436 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8437
8438 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8439 {
8440 add_pat = -1;
8441 p = pat[i];
8442
8443#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8444 if (vim_backtick(p))
8445 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8446 else
8447#endif
8448 {
8449 /*
8450 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8451 */
8452 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8453 {
8454 p = expand_env_save(p);
8455 if (p == NULL)
8456 p = pat[i];
8457#ifdef UNIX
8458 /*
8459 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8460 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously
8461 * found file names and start all over again.
8462 */
8463 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8464 {
8465 vim_free(p);
8466 ga_clear(&ga);
8467 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8468 flags);
8469 recursive = FALSE;
8470 return i;
8471 }
8472#endif
8473 }
8474
8475 /*
8476 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8477 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8478 * the pattern.
8479 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8480 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8481 */
8482 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8483 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8484 }
8485
8486 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8487 {
8488 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8489
8490#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8491 slash_to_colon(t);
8492#endif
8493 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes
8494 * "vim c:/" work. */
8495 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8496 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8497 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8498 addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8499 vim_free(t);
8500 }
8501
8502 if (p != pat[i])
8503 vim_free(p);
8504 }
8505
8506 *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8507 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8508
8509 recursive = FALSE;
8510
8511 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8512}
8513
8514# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8515
8516/*
8517 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8518 */
8519 static int
8520vim_backtick(p)
8521 char_u *p;
8522{
8523 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8524}
8525
8526/*
8527 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8528 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8529 * Returns number of file names found.
8530 */
8531 static int
8532expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8533 garray_T *gap;
8534 char_u *pat;
8535 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8536{
8537 char_u *p;
8538 char_u *cmd;
8539 char_u *buffer;
8540 int cnt = 0;
8541 int i;
8542
8543 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8544 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8545 if (cmd == NULL)
8546 return 0;
8547
8548#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8549 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8550 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8551 else
8552#endif
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008553 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8554 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008555 vim_free(cmd);
8556 if (buffer == NULL)
8557 return 0;
8558
8559 cmd = buffer;
8560 while (*cmd != NUL)
8561 {
8562 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */
8563 p = cmd;
8564 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8565 ++p;
8566 /* add an entry if it is not empty */
8567 if (p > cmd)
8568 {
8569 i = *p;
8570 *p = NUL;
8571 addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8572 *p = i;
8573 ++cnt;
8574 }
8575 cmd = p;
8576 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8577 ++cmd;
8578 }
8579
8580 vim_free(buffer);
8581 return cnt;
8582}
8583# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8584
8585/*
8586 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags:
8587 * EW_DIR add directories
8588 * EW_FILE add files
8589 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist
8590 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name
8591 */
8592 void
8593addfile(gap, f, flags)
8594 garray_T *gap;
8595 char_u *f; /* filename */
8596 int flags;
8597{
8598 char_u *p;
8599 int isdir;
8600
8601 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8602 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8603 return;
8604
8605#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8606 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8607 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8608 return;
8609#endif
8610
8611 isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8612 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8613 return;
8614
8615 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8616 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8617 return;
8618
8619 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8620 if (p == NULL)
8621 return;
8622
8623 STRCPY(p, f);
8624#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8625 slash_adjust(p);
8626#endif
8627 /*
8628 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8629 */
8630#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8631 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8632 add_pathsep(p);
8633#endif
8634 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008635}
8636#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8637
8638#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8639
8640#ifndef SEEK_SET
8641# define SEEK_SET 0
8642#endif
8643#ifndef SEEK_END
8644# define SEEK_END 2
8645#endif
8646
8647/*
8648 * Get the stdout of an external command.
8649 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8650 */
8651 char_u *
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008652get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008653 char_u *cmd;
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008654 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008655 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8656{
8657 char_u *tempname;
8658 char_u *command;
8659 char_u *buffer = NULL;
8660 int len;
8661 int i = 0;
8662 FILE *fd;
8663
8664 if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8665 return NULL;
8666
8667 /* get a name for the temp file */
8668 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8669 {
8670 EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8671 return NULL;
8672 }
8673
8674 /* Add the redirection stuff */
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008675 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008676 if (command == NULL)
8677 goto done;
8678
8679 /*
8680 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
8681 * Don't check timestamps here.
8682 */
8683 ++no_check_timestamps;
8684 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
8685 --no_check_timestamps;
8686
8687 vim_free(command);
8688
8689 /*
8690 * read the names from the file into memory
8691 */
8692# ifdef VMS
8693 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
8694 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
8695# else
8696 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
8697# endif
8698
8699 if (fd == NULL)
8700 {
8701 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
8702 goto done;
8703 }
8704
8705 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
8706 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */
8707 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
8708
8709 buffer = alloc(len + 1);
8710 if (buffer != NULL)
8711 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
8712 fclose(fd);
8713 mch_remove(tempname);
8714 if (buffer == NULL)
8715 goto done;
8716#ifdef VMS
8717 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
8718#endif
8719 if (i != len)
8720 {
8721 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
8722 vim_free(buffer);
8723 buffer = NULL;
8724 }
8725 else
8726 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */
8727
8728done:
8729 vim_free(tempname);
8730 return buffer;
8731}
8732#endif
8733
8734/*
8735 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
8736 * functions.
8737 */
8738 void
8739FreeWild(count, files)
8740 int count;
8741 char_u **files;
8742{
8743 if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
8744 return;
8745#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
8746 /*
8747 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
8748 * been used???
8749 */
8750 _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
8751#else
8752 while (count--)
8753 vim_free(files[count]);
8754 vim_free(files);
8755#endif
8756}
8757
8758/*
8759 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
8760 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
8761 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
8762 */
8763 int
8764goto_im()
8765{
8766 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
8767}